CA2170989A1 - Abrasive article, method of manufacture of same, method of using same for finishing, and a production tool - Google Patents
Abrasive article, method of manufacture of same, method of using same for finishing, and a production toolInfo
- Publication number
- CA2170989A1 CA2170989A1 CA 2170989 CA2170989A CA2170989A1 CA 2170989 A1 CA2170989 A1 CA 2170989A1 CA 2170989 CA2170989 CA 2170989 CA 2170989 A CA2170989 A CA 2170989A CA 2170989 A1 CA2170989 A1 CA 2170989A1
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- abrasive
- composites
- composite
- abrasive article
- production tool
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B24—GRINDING; POLISHING
- B24D—TOOLS FOR GRINDING, BUFFING OR SHARPENING
- B24D3/00—Physical features of abrasive bodies, or sheets, e.g. abrasive surfaces of special nature; Abrasive bodies or sheets characterised by their constituents
- B24D3/02—Physical features of abrasive bodies, or sheets, e.g. abrasive surfaces of special nature; Abrasive bodies or sheets characterised by their constituents the constituent being used as bonding agent
- B24D3/20—Physical features of abrasive bodies, or sheets, e.g. abrasive surfaces of special nature; Abrasive bodies or sheets characterised by their constituents the constituent being used as bonding agent and being essentially organic
- B24D3/28—Resins or natural or synthetic macromolecular compounds
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B24—GRINDING; POLISHING
- B24D—TOOLS FOR GRINDING, BUFFING OR SHARPENING
- B24D11/00—Constructional features of flexible abrasive materials; Special features in the manufacture of such materials
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B24—GRINDING; POLISHING
- B24D—TOOLS FOR GRINDING, BUFFING OR SHARPENING
- B24D11/00—Constructional features of flexible abrasive materials; Special features in the manufacture of such materials
- B24D11/001—Manufacture of flexible abrasive materials
- B24D11/005—Making abrasive webs
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B24—GRINDING; POLISHING
- B24D—TOOLS FOR GRINDING, BUFFING OR SHARPENING
- B24D18/00—Manufacture of grinding tools or other grinding devices, e.g. wheels, not otherwise provided for
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T29/00—Metal working
- Y10T29/49—Method of mechanical manufacture
- Y10T29/4998—Combined manufacture including applying or shaping of fluent material
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T29/00—Metal working
- Y10T29/49—Method of mechanical manufacture
- Y10T29/49995—Shaping one-piece blank by removing material
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T83/00—Cutting
- Y10T83/04—Processes
- Y10T83/05—With reorientation of tool between cuts
Abstract
An abrasive article (10) is provided having a sheet-like structure having a major surface (16) having deployed in fixed position thereon a plurality of abrasive three-dimensional abrasive composites (12), each of the composites comprising abrasive particles dispersed in a binder (14) and having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernible boundary (15) that includes specific dimensions, wherein the precise shapes are not all identical. The invention also relates to methods for manufacturing such an abrasive article (10), including the production tool and production tool master used in the scheme of manufacturing the abrasive article (10).
Description
~ W095/07797 2 ~ ~ ~ q~ ~ ~ PCT~S94/00754 ABRA8IVB ARTICLE, METHOD OF MAN~FACTURE
OF ~AME, METHOD OF U~ING 8ANE FOR FTNT~UTNG, AND A PROD~CTION TOO~
~ CAh FIELD
This invention relates to an abrasive article having a sheet-like structure having a major surface having deployed thereon a plurality of abrasive composites having precise shapes, wherein the precise 10 shapes are not all identical. The invention also relates to methods of manufacturing an abrasive article, and a production tool used to manufacture such an abrasive article, and a method of using such an abrasive article to reduce a surface finish.
B~R~R~ D ART
In general, abrasive articles employ a plurality of abrasive particles which are bonded together as a unitary structure (e.g., a grinding wheel) or bonded 20 separately to a common backing (e.g., a coated abrasive article). While these types of abrasive articles have been utilized to abrade and finish workpieces for many years, problems remain in the field.
For instance, one persistent problem confronting 25 the abrasive industry arises from the generally inverse relationship associated between the cut rate (i.e., the amoun~ of workpiece removed for a given time interval) and the finish that is imparted by the abrasive article on the workpiece surface. That is, it is difficult to 30 design an abrasive article that affords a relatively high rate of cut while concomitantly imparting a relatively fine surface finish on the workpiece being abraded. This explains the presence of a wide range of abrasive products in the market using coarse grit (i.e., relatively large particle size of abrasive particles) to fine grit (i.e., relatively small SllBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 ~
particle size of abrasive particles). The use of these differently grit-sized abrasive products in a separate and sequential manner can provide some measure of success in ultimately achieving both a high cut and a 5 fine finish, but the practice can be cumbersome and time consuming. Naturally, a single abrasive article which simultaneously would provide both high cut rate and fine finish would be more convenient and highly desired in the industry.
In addition to these goals, it has also been desired in the abrasive industry to provide an abrasive article which imparts a consistent surface finish in the workpiecç while lessening or preventing scribing and/or chatter. Scribing refers to the occurrence of 15 pronounced unwanted grooves in the workpiece surface which results in an increase in surface roughness units (Ra). Ra is the arithmetic average of the scratch depth. Typically, the grooves, when they occur, extend in the surface of the workpiece in a direction tracking 20 the relative motion of the abrasive article vis-a-vis the workpiece surface. On the other hand, chatter means an undesirable repetive pattern created on the surface of a workpiece, usually at regular spaced intervals at a direction perpendicular to the direction of belt 25 movement.
While various attempts have been made to create new and improved abrasive products, no complete solution to the problems noted above have been presented. While the following list of references 30 describe a variety of abrasive products none is known to provide a completely satisfactory result to these problems.
More specifically, U.S. Patent No. 2,115,897 (Wooddell et al.) teaches an abrasive article having a 35 backing and attached thereto by an adhesive are a plurality of blocks of bonded abrasive material. These SUBSTITUTE S~IE~T (R~E 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 ~ ~ ~ PCT~S94/00754 bonded abrasive blocks can be adhesively secured to the backing in a specified pattern.
U.S. Patent No. 2,242,877 (Albertson) teaches a method of making a compressed abrasive disc. The 5 method involves emh~ing abrasive particles in a binder layer that is coated on a fibrous backing. Then, a mold die is used to impart a molded pattern or contour into the thickness of binder and particle layer under heat and pressure to form a compressed abrasive lO disc. The molded surface of the abrasive disc has a specified working surface pattern which is the inverse of the profile of the molding die.
U.S. Patent No. 2,755,607 (Haywood) teaches a coated abrasive in which there are land and groove 15 abrasive portions, which can form, for example, an overall rectlinear or serpentine pattern. An adhesive coat is applied to the front surface of a backing and this adhesive coat is then combed to create peaks and valleys to pattern the surface of the adhesive coat.
20 Haywood discloses that each of the lands and grooves formed in the adhesive coat by such a combing procedure preferably have the same width and thickness, but that they may be varied. Next the abrasive grains are distributed uniformly in the lands and grooves of the 25 previously patterned adhesive coat followed by solidification of the adhesive coat. The abrasive particles used in Haywood are individual grains which are not used in slurry form with other grains in a binder. Therefore, the individual abrasive grains have 30 irregular non-precise shapes.
U.S. Patent No. 3,048,482 (Hurst) discloses an abrasive article comprising a backing, a bond system and abrasive granules that are secured to the backing by the bond system. The abrasive granules are a 35 composite of abrasive grains and a binder which is separate from the bond system. The abrasive granules ~UBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 are three dimensional and are preferably pyramidal in shape. To make this abrasive article, the abrasive granules are first made via a molding process. Next, a backing is placed in a mold, followed by the bond 5 system and the abrasive granules. The mold has patternized cavities therein which results in the abrasive granules having a specified pattern on the backing.
U.S. Patent No. 3,605,349 (Anthon) pertains to a 10 lapping type abrasive article. The binder and the abrasive grain are mixed together and then sprayed onto the backing through a grid. The presence of the grid results in a patterned abrasive coating.
Great Britain Patent Application No. 2,094,824 (Moore) pertains to a patterned lapping film. The abrasive slurry is prepared and the slurry is applied through a mask to form discrete islands. Next, the resin or binder is cured. The mask can be a silk screen, stencil, wire, or a mesh.
U.S. Patent No. 4,644,703 (Kaczmarek et al.) concerns a lapping abrasive article comprising a backing and an abrasive coating adhered to the backing.
The abrasive coating further comprises a suspension of lapping size abrasive grains and a binder cured by free 25 radical polymerization. The abrasive coating can be shaped into a pattern by a rotogravure roll.
U.S. Patent No. 4,773,920 (Chasman et al.) concerns a lapping abrasive article comprising a backing and an abrasive coating adhered to the backing.
30 The abrasive coating comprises a suspension of lapping size abrasive grains and a binder cured by free radical polymerization. The abrasive coating can be shaped into a pattern by a rotogravure roll.
U.S. Patent No. 4,930,266 (Calhoun et al.) teaches 35 a patterned abrasive sheeting in which the abrasive granules are strongly bonded and lie substantially in a SUBSTITlJT~ SHEET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 ~ 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 plane at a predetermined lateral spacing. In this invention the abrasive granules are applied via a impingement ter-hn;que so that each granule is essentially individually applied to the abrasive 5 backing. This results in an abrasive sheeting having a precisely controlled spacing of the abrasive granules.
U.S. Patent No. 5,014,468 (Ravipati et al.) pertains to a lapping film intended for ophthalmic applications. The lapping film comprises a patterned 0 surface coating of abrasive grains dispersed in a radiation cured adhesive binder. The patterned surface coating has a plurality of discrete raised three dimensional formations having widths which dim;n;~h in the direction away from the backing. To make the 15 patterned surface, an abrasive slurry is applied to a rotogravure roll to provide a shapes surface which is then removed from the roll surface and then the radiation curable resin is cured.
U.S. Patent No. 5,015,266 (Yamamoto) pertains to 20 an abrasive sheet by uniformly coating an abrasive adhesive slurry over an embossed sheet. The resulting abrasive coating has high and low abrasive portions formed by the surface tension of the slurry, corresponding to the irregularities of the base sheet.
U.S. Patent No. 5,107,626 (Mucci) teaches a method of providing a patterned surface on a substrate by abrading with a coated abrasive containing a plurality of precisely shaped abrasive composites. The abrasive composites are in a non-random array and the abrasive 30 composites comprise a plurality of abrasive grains dispersed in a binder.
U.S. Patent No. 5,152,917 (Pieper et al.) discloses a coated abrasive article that provides both a relatively high rate of cut and a relatively fine 35 surface finish on the workpiece surface. The structured abrasive of Pieper et al. involves precisely ~llBS~lTUTE SH~ET (RI~LE 26) W095l07797 2 1 7 ~ 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 shaped abrasive composites that are bonded to a backing in a regular nonrandom pattern. The consistency of the profile of the abrasive composites provided by the abrasive strucutre of Pieper et al., among other 5 things, helps provide a consistent surface finish in the worked surface.
Japanese Patent Application No. S63-235942 published March 23, 1990 teaches a method of a making a lapping film having a specified pattern. An abrasive 10 slurry is coated into a network of indentations in a tool. A backing is then applied over the tool and the binder in the abrasive slurry is cured. Next, the resulting coated abrasive is removed from the tool.
The binder can be cured by radiation energy or thermal 15 energy.
Japanese Patent Application No. JP 4-159084 published June 2, 1992 teaches a method of making a lapping tape. An abrasive slurry comprising abrasive grains and an electron beam curable resin is applied to 20 the surface of an intaglio roll or indentation plate having a network of indentations. Then, the abrasive slurry is exposed to an electron beam which cures the binder and the resulting lapping tape is removed from the roll.
United States patent application No. 07/820,155 filed 13 January 1992 (Calhoun), which is commonly assigned to the owner of the present application, teaches a method of making an abrasive article. An abrasive slurry is coated into recesses of an embossed 30 substrate. The resulting construction is laminated to a backing and the binder in the abrasive slurry is cured. The embossed substrate is removed and the abrasive slurry adheres to the backing.
U.S. Patent No. 5,219,462 (Bruxvoort et al.) 35 teaches a method for making an abrasive article. An abrasive slurry is coated substantially only into the SllBSTITlJTE SHEE~ (R~LE 26) ~ W 0 95/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 ~ PCT~US94/007S4 recesses of a~ embossed backing. The abrasive slurry comprises a binder, abrasive grains and an expanding agent. After coating, the binder is cured and the expanding agent is activated. This causes the slurry 5 to ~pAn~ above the surface of the embossed backing.
United States patent application No. 08/004,929 filed 14 January 1993 (Spurgeon et al.), which is commonly assigned to the owner of the present application, teaches a method of making an abrasive 10 article. In one aspect of this patent application, an abrasive slurry is coated into recesses of an embossed substrate. Radiation energy is transmitted through the embossed substrate and into the abrasive slurry to cure the binder.
United States patent application No. 08/067,708 filed 26 May 1993 (Mucci et al.), which is commonly assigned to the owner of the present application, teaches a method of polishing a workpiece with a structured abrasive. The structured abrasive comprises 20 a plurality of precisely shaped abrasive composites bonded to a backing. During polishing, the structured abrasive oscillates.
The use of variable pitch sawing teeth has been disclosed as a cutting edge for a hack saw blade, such 25 as mentioned in a trade advertisement distributed by Lenox Co. and entitled "Lenox Hackmaster V Vari-Tooth Power Hack Saw Blades", to provide balanced cutting action and quiet performance. This hack saw blade design is described as useful to saw metal bar stock, 30 ganged workpieces, or work with holes, slots or interruptions. This hack saw blade design is not specifically disclosed as adaptable for frictional abrasion applications between two rubbing surfaces including a complex three-dimensional working surface, 35 nor does the LENOX publication disclose the wherewithal therefor.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RUEE 26) WO9S/07797 2 ~ 7 ~ 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 Although some of the abrasive articles made according to the aforementioned patents, viz. Pieper et al., might provide an abrasive article yielding both high rate of cut and relatively fine finish, it has 5 been observed that scribing can occur in surfaces worked by some prior art abrasive articles when the abrasive articles are used. For instance, many abrasive articles have directional limitations insofar as how the articles are to be oriented relative to the work lO surface to be reduced, i.e., some articles cannot be used omnidirectionally. If used improperly by accident or neglect, e.g., if such an abrasive article is not properly aligned with the surface to be worked by the operator, these abrasive articles, among other things, 15 can cause scribing in the worked surface.
Therefore, it can be understood that the abrasive industry would highly value a versatile high-cut rate, fine finish abrasive article which is more resistant to inadvertent scribing and more adaptable to a wider 20 range of abrasive conditions.
DI~C~08URE OF THE lNV~. lON
The present invention provides an abrasive article which has a high cut rate yet imparts a relatively fine surface finish. The invention provides an abrasive 25 article having a sheet-like structure having a major surface having deployed thereon a plurality of precisely shaped abrasive composites, wherein not all shapes are identical. The invention also provides methods of manufacturing the abrasive article, a 30 production tool useful in such methods, and a methods of using the abrasive article to reduce surface finish.
In one embodiment, this invention relates to an abrasive article having a sheet-like structure having a major surface having deployed in fixed position thereon 35 a plurality of abrasive three-~; ?n~ional abrasive composites, each of the composites comprising abrasive SUBSTITUT~ SHE~T (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 ~ ~ 8 9 PCT~Sg4l0075q particles dispersed in a binder and having a substantially precise shape defined by a substantially distinct and discernible boundary which includes substantially specific dimensions, wherein the precise 5 shapes are not all identical.
In a further embodiment, substantially all of the aforesaid abrasive composites exist as pairs, each pair including two unmatched abrasive composites, one abrasive composite having a nonidentical shape to an 10 adjacent abrasive composite.
Yet another embodiment of this invention relates to an abrasive article wherein the aforesaid abrasive composites include a first abrasive composite having a first precise shape having specific first dimensions 15 and a second abrasive composite having a second precise shape and second specific dimensions wherein the first and the second specific dimensions are nonidentical.
In a further embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, the aforesaid first and second abrasive 20 composites each has a boundary defined by at least four planar surfaces wherein adjacent planar surfaces meet to define an edge of a certain length, wherein at least one edge of the first composite has a length which is different from the length of all edges of the second 25 composite. In one further embodiment, the length of the at least one edge of the first composite has a length which varies with respect to the length of any edge of the second composite in a ratio between 10:1 to 1:10, not inclusive of 1:1.
In another embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, the aforesaid first and second abrasive composites have a first and second geometrical shape, respectively, which are nonidentical. For example, the aforesaid first and second geometrical shapes can be 35 selected from different members of the group of geometrical shapes consisting of cubic, prismatic, SU~STITUTF SHEET (Rl~LE 26) WO9S/07797 2 1 7 0 q 8 9 PCT~S~4/00754 conical, truncated conical, cylindrical, pyramidal, and truncated pyramidal.
In another embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, each abrasive composite has a boundary 5 defined by at least four planar surfaces wherein adjacent planar surfaces meet at an edge to define an angle of intersection therebetween, wherein at least one angle of intersection of the the first abrasive composite is different from all of the angles of lO intersection of the second composite. In a preferred embodiment, no angle of intersection of adjacent planar surfaces in the first abrasive composite is equal to O
or 9O. In a further embodiment thereof, substantially all the abrasive composites have a pyramidal shape.
In another preferred embodiment of the invention, the surface of the abrasive article has a machine direction and opposite side edges, each side edge being parallel to the machine direction axis and each side edge being respectively within a first and second 20 imaginary plane each of which is perpendicular to the surface, a plurality of parallel elongate abrasive ridges deployed in fixed position on the surface, each ridge having a longitll~in~l axis located at its transverse center and exte~ing along an imaginary line 25 which intersects the first and second planes at an angle which is neither 0 nor 9O, and wherein each abrasive ridge comprises a plurality of the aforesaid three-dimensional abrasive composites which are intermittently spaced along the longitudinal axis.
In a further embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, the aforesaid plurality of parallel elongate abrasive ridges are deployed in first and second groups wherein the first and second groups are located at nonoverlapping locations in the in the 35 machine direction or in a direction perpendicular to the machine direction of the major surface, wherein the JTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095107797 ~ 70 q g q PCT~S94/00754 longitudinal axis of at least one abrasive ridge within the first group extends along an imaginary line that intersects with an imaginary line extending from at least one longit~inAl axis of an abrasive ridge in the 5 second group.
In yet another embodiment of the abrasive article of the present invention, each abrasive ridge has a distal end spaced from the surface and each distal end extends to a third imaginary plane which is spaced from 10 and parallel to the surface. For example, in one embodiment, the abrasive composites have the same height value measured from the surface to distal end in a range of from about 50 micrometers and about 1020 micrometers.
In another preferred embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, abrasive composites are fixed on the major surface in a density of about 100 to about 10,000 abrasive composites/cm2. In one ~urther embodiment, substantially the entire surface area of 20 the major surface is covered by the abrasive composites.
In another embodiment of the invention relating to a method for making an abrasive article described herein, a method comprises the steps of:
(a) preparing an abrasive slurry wherein the abrasive slurry comprises a plurality of abrasive particles dispersed in a binder precursor;
(b) providing a backing having a front surface and a back surface; and a production tool provided with a plurality of cavities in at least one major surface thereof, each cavity having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernible boundary which includes specific dimensions, wherein the precise cavity shapes are not all identical;
SUB~T~TU T E SHEET (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 2 1 70~8~ PCT~S94/00754 (c) providing a means to apply the abrasive slurry into a plurality of the cavities of the production tool;
(d) contacting the front surface of the backing with the production tool such that the abrasive slurry wets the front surface;
(e) solidifying the binder precursor to form a binder, whereupon solidification the abrasive slurry is converted into a plurality of abrasive composites; and (f) separating the production tool from the backing after the solidifying to provide a plurality of abrasive composites as attached to the backing each having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernable boundary which include specific ~imenfiions, wherein the precise abrasive composite shapes are not all identical.
It is preferred that the six steps are carried out 20 in a continuous manner, thereby providing an efficient method of making a coated abrasive article.
Alternatively, this method can be practiced where the abrasive slurry can be applied to the backing instead of the production tool before contacting of the 25 coated backing with the cavitated side of the production tool to fill the cavities in same.
In still another embodiment, the abrasive composite described herein is used in a method to reduce the surface of a workpiece, having the steps of:
(a) bringing into frictional contact a workpiece surface and the above-described abrasive article; and (b) moving at least one of said abrasive article or said workpiece surface relative to the other such that the surface finish of said workpiece surface is reduced.
SUBSTlTU~E ~H~T (RU~E 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 In yet another embodiment, the invention relates to a production tool for making the aforesaid abrasive article, which comprises a sheet-like structure having a plurality of cavities formed on a major surface 5 thereof, each cavity having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernible boundary which includes specific dimensions, wherein the precise cavity shapes are not all identical.
In another embodiment of the invention, there is a 10 method of making a master, and the product of this method, which can be used to form the aforesaid production tool, said master having a major surface extending within a first imaginary plane, comprising the steps of:
(1) determining angles corresponding to facing right and left planar surfaces of adjacent three-dimensional shapes and wherein each of said angles has a value as measured between its planar surface and a plane which extends in a normal direction to said 20 master surface and contains an edge of said planar surface in contact with said surface, by the following substeps:
(i) selecting an angle value between, but not including, 0 and 90 to establish a first right half 25 angle of a first right planar surface of a first right-side three-dimensional shape with a random number generating means capable of randomly selecting an angle value between, but not including, 0 and 90;
(ii) selecting an angle value between, but 30 not including, 0 and 90 with said random number generating means to establish a first left half angle for a first left planar surface of a first left-side - three-dimensional shape facing said first right planar surface of said first right-side three-dimensional 35 shape;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 709~9 PCT~S94/00754 ~
(iii) proc~ing along a first direction exten~ing linearly within said first imaginary plane to a second left planar surface of a second left-side three-dimensional shape located adjacent said first 5 left-side three-dimensional shape and using said random number generating means to select a value between, but not including, 0 and 90 to establish a second left planar angle for said second left planar surface;
(iv) using said random number generating 10 means to select a value between, but not including, O
and 90 for a second right planar surface of a second right-side three-dimensional shape facing said second left planar surface;
(v) proceeding along said first direction to 15 a third right-side three-dimensional shape located adjacent said second right-side three-dimensional shape;
(vi) repeating said substeps (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), and (v), in that sequence, at least once;
OF ~AME, METHOD OF U~ING 8ANE FOR FTNT~UTNG, AND A PROD~CTION TOO~
~ CAh FIELD
This invention relates to an abrasive article having a sheet-like structure having a major surface having deployed thereon a plurality of abrasive composites having precise shapes, wherein the precise 10 shapes are not all identical. The invention also relates to methods of manufacturing an abrasive article, and a production tool used to manufacture such an abrasive article, and a method of using such an abrasive article to reduce a surface finish.
B~R~R~ D ART
In general, abrasive articles employ a plurality of abrasive particles which are bonded together as a unitary structure (e.g., a grinding wheel) or bonded 20 separately to a common backing (e.g., a coated abrasive article). While these types of abrasive articles have been utilized to abrade and finish workpieces for many years, problems remain in the field.
For instance, one persistent problem confronting 25 the abrasive industry arises from the generally inverse relationship associated between the cut rate (i.e., the amoun~ of workpiece removed for a given time interval) and the finish that is imparted by the abrasive article on the workpiece surface. That is, it is difficult to 30 design an abrasive article that affords a relatively high rate of cut while concomitantly imparting a relatively fine surface finish on the workpiece being abraded. This explains the presence of a wide range of abrasive products in the market using coarse grit (i.e., relatively large particle size of abrasive particles) to fine grit (i.e., relatively small SllBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 ~
particle size of abrasive particles). The use of these differently grit-sized abrasive products in a separate and sequential manner can provide some measure of success in ultimately achieving both a high cut and a 5 fine finish, but the practice can be cumbersome and time consuming. Naturally, a single abrasive article which simultaneously would provide both high cut rate and fine finish would be more convenient and highly desired in the industry.
In addition to these goals, it has also been desired in the abrasive industry to provide an abrasive article which imparts a consistent surface finish in the workpiecç while lessening or preventing scribing and/or chatter. Scribing refers to the occurrence of 15 pronounced unwanted grooves in the workpiece surface which results in an increase in surface roughness units (Ra). Ra is the arithmetic average of the scratch depth. Typically, the grooves, when they occur, extend in the surface of the workpiece in a direction tracking 20 the relative motion of the abrasive article vis-a-vis the workpiece surface. On the other hand, chatter means an undesirable repetive pattern created on the surface of a workpiece, usually at regular spaced intervals at a direction perpendicular to the direction of belt 25 movement.
While various attempts have been made to create new and improved abrasive products, no complete solution to the problems noted above have been presented. While the following list of references 30 describe a variety of abrasive products none is known to provide a completely satisfactory result to these problems.
More specifically, U.S. Patent No. 2,115,897 (Wooddell et al.) teaches an abrasive article having a 35 backing and attached thereto by an adhesive are a plurality of blocks of bonded abrasive material. These SUBSTITUTE S~IE~T (R~E 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 ~ ~ ~ PCT~S94/00754 bonded abrasive blocks can be adhesively secured to the backing in a specified pattern.
U.S. Patent No. 2,242,877 (Albertson) teaches a method of making a compressed abrasive disc. The 5 method involves emh~ing abrasive particles in a binder layer that is coated on a fibrous backing. Then, a mold die is used to impart a molded pattern or contour into the thickness of binder and particle layer under heat and pressure to form a compressed abrasive lO disc. The molded surface of the abrasive disc has a specified working surface pattern which is the inverse of the profile of the molding die.
U.S. Patent No. 2,755,607 (Haywood) teaches a coated abrasive in which there are land and groove 15 abrasive portions, which can form, for example, an overall rectlinear or serpentine pattern. An adhesive coat is applied to the front surface of a backing and this adhesive coat is then combed to create peaks and valleys to pattern the surface of the adhesive coat.
20 Haywood discloses that each of the lands and grooves formed in the adhesive coat by such a combing procedure preferably have the same width and thickness, but that they may be varied. Next the abrasive grains are distributed uniformly in the lands and grooves of the 25 previously patterned adhesive coat followed by solidification of the adhesive coat. The abrasive particles used in Haywood are individual grains which are not used in slurry form with other grains in a binder. Therefore, the individual abrasive grains have 30 irregular non-precise shapes.
U.S. Patent No. 3,048,482 (Hurst) discloses an abrasive article comprising a backing, a bond system and abrasive granules that are secured to the backing by the bond system. The abrasive granules are a 35 composite of abrasive grains and a binder which is separate from the bond system. The abrasive granules ~UBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 are three dimensional and are preferably pyramidal in shape. To make this abrasive article, the abrasive granules are first made via a molding process. Next, a backing is placed in a mold, followed by the bond 5 system and the abrasive granules. The mold has patternized cavities therein which results in the abrasive granules having a specified pattern on the backing.
U.S. Patent No. 3,605,349 (Anthon) pertains to a 10 lapping type abrasive article. The binder and the abrasive grain are mixed together and then sprayed onto the backing through a grid. The presence of the grid results in a patterned abrasive coating.
Great Britain Patent Application No. 2,094,824 (Moore) pertains to a patterned lapping film. The abrasive slurry is prepared and the slurry is applied through a mask to form discrete islands. Next, the resin or binder is cured. The mask can be a silk screen, stencil, wire, or a mesh.
U.S. Patent No. 4,644,703 (Kaczmarek et al.) concerns a lapping abrasive article comprising a backing and an abrasive coating adhered to the backing.
The abrasive coating further comprises a suspension of lapping size abrasive grains and a binder cured by free 25 radical polymerization. The abrasive coating can be shaped into a pattern by a rotogravure roll.
U.S. Patent No. 4,773,920 (Chasman et al.) concerns a lapping abrasive article comprising a backing and an abrasive coating adhered to the backing.
30 The abrasive coating comprises a suspension of lapping size abrasive grains and a binder cured by free radical polymerization. The abrasive coating can be shaped into a pattern by a rotogravure roll.
U.S. Patent No. 4,930,266 (Calhoun et al.) teaches 35 a patterned abrasive sheeting in which the abrasive granules are strongly bonded and lie substantially in a SUBSTITlJT~ SHEET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 ~ 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 plane at a predetermined lateral spacing. In this invention the abrasive granules are applied via a impingement ter-hn;que so that each granule is essentially individually applied to the abrasive 5 backing. This results in an abrasive sheeting having a precisely controlled spacing of the abrasive granules.
U.S. Patent No. 5,014,468 (Ravipati et al.) pertains to a lapping film intended for ophthalmic applications. The lapping film comprises a patterned 0 surface coating of abrasive grains dispersed in a radiation cured adhesive binder. The patterned surface coating has a plurality of discrete raised three dimensional formations having widths which dim;n;~h in the direction away from the backing. To make the 15 patterned surface, an abrasive slurry is applied to a rotogravure roll to provide a shapes surface which is then removed from the roll surface and then the radiation curable resin is cured.
U.S. Patent No. 5,015,266 (Yamamoto) pertains to 20 an abrasive sheet by uniformly coating an abrasive adhesive slurry over an embossed sheet. The resulting abrasive coating has high and low abrasive portions formed by the surface tension of the slurry, corresponding to the irregularities of the base sheet.
U.S. Patent No. 5,107,626 (Mucci) teaches a method of providing a patterned surface on a substrate by abrading with a coated abrasive containing a plurality of precisely shaped abrasive composites. The abrasive composites are in a non-random array and the abrasive 30 composites comprise a plurality of abrasive grains dispersed in a binder.
U.S. Patent No. 5,152,917 (Pieper et al.) discloses a coated abrasive article that provides both a relatively high rate of cut and a relatively fine 35 surface finish on the workpiece surface. The structured abrasive of Pieper et al. involves precisely ~llBS~lTUTE SH~ET (RI~LE 26) W095l07797 2 1 7 ~ 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 shaped abrasive composites that are bonded to a backing in a regular nonrandom pattern. The consistency of the profile of the abrasive composites provided by the abrasive strucutre of Pieper et al., among other 5 things, helps provide a consistent surface finish in the worked surface.
Japanese Patent Application No. S63-235942 published March 23, 1990 teaches a method of a making a lapping film having a specified pattern. An abrasive 10 slurry is coated into a network of indentations in a tool. A backing is then applied over the tool and the binder in the abrasive slurry is cured. Next, the resulting coated abrasive is removed from the tool.
The binder can be cured by radiation energy or thermal 15 energy.
Japanese Patent Application No. JP 4-159084 published June 2, 1992 teaches a method of making a lapping tape. An abrasive slurry comprising abrasive grains and an electron beam curable resin is applied to 20 the surface of an intaglio roll or indentation plate having a network of indentations. Then, the abrasive slurry is exposed to an electron beam which cures the binder and the resulting lapping tape is removed from the roll.
United States patent application No. 07/820,155 filed 13 January 1992 (Calhoun), which is commonly assigned to the owner of the present application, teaches a method of making an abrasive article. An abrasive slurry is coated into recesses of an embossed 30 substrate. The resulting construction is laminated to a backing and the binder in the abrasive slurry is cured. The embossed substrate is removed and the abrasive slurry adheres to the backing.
U.S. Patent No. 5,219,462 (Bruxvoort et al.) 35 teaches a method for making an abrasive article. An abrasive slurry is coated substantially only into the SllBSTITlJTE SHEE~ (R~LE 26) ~ W 0 95/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 ~ PCT~US94/007S4 recesses of a~ embossed backing. The abrasive slurry comprises a binder, abrasive grains and an expanding agent. After coating, the binder is cured and the expanding agent is activated. This causes the slurry 5 to ~pAn~ above the surface of the embossed backing.
United States patent application No. 08/004,929 filed 14 January 1993 (Spurgeon et al.), which is commonly assigned to the owner of the present application, teaches a method of making an abrasive 10 article. In one aspect of this patent application, an abrasive slurry is coated into recesses of an embossed substrate. Radiation energy is transmitted through the embossed substrate and into the abrasive slurry to cure the binder.
United States patent application No. 08/067,708 filed 26 May 1993 (Mucci et al.), which is commonly assigned to the owner of the present application, teaches a method of polishing a workpiece with a structured abrasive. The structured abrasive comprises 20 a plurality of precisely shaped abrasive composites bonded to a backing. During polishing, the structured abrasive oscillates.
The use of variable pitch sawing teeth has been disclosed as a cutting edge for a hack saw blade, such 25 as mentioned in a trade advertisement distributed by Lenox Co. and entitled "Lenox Hackmaster V Vari-Tooth Power Hack Saw Blades", to provide balanced cutting action and quiet performance. This hack saw blade design is described as useful to saw metal bar stock, 30 ganged workpieces, or work with holes, slots or interruptions. This hack saw blade design is not specifically disclosed as adaptable for frictional abrasion applications between two rubbing surfaces including a complex three-dimensional working surface, 35 nor does the LENOX publication disclose the wherewithal therefor.
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RUEE 26) WO9S/07797 2 ~ 7 ~ 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 Although some of the abrasive articles made according to the aforementioned patents, viz. Pieper et al., might provide an abrasive article yielding both high rate of cut and relatively fine finish, it has 5 been observed that scribing can occur in surfaces worked by some prior art abrasive articles when the abrasive articles are used. For instance, many abrasive articles have directional limitations insofar as how the articles are to be oriented relative to the work lO surface to be reduced, i.e., some articles cannot be used omnidirectionally. If used improperly by accident or neglect, e.g., if such an abrasive article is not properly aligned with the surface to be worked by the operator, these abrasive articles, among other things, 15 can cause scribing in the worked surface.
Therefore, it can be understood that the abrasive industry would highly value a versatile high-cut rate, fine finish abrasive article which is more resistant to inadvertent scribing and more adaptable to a wider 20 range of abrasive conditions.
DI~C~08URE OF THE lNV~. lON
The present invention provides an abrasive article which has a high cut rate yet imparts a relatively fine surface finish. The invention provides an abrasive 25 article having a sheet-like structure having a major surface having deployed thereon a plurality of precisely shaped abrasive composites, wherein not all shapes are identical. The invention also provides methods of manufacturing the abrasive article, a 30 production tool useful in such methods, and a methods of using the abrasive article to reduce surface finish.
In one embodiment, this invention relates to an abrasive article having a sheet-like structure having a major surface having deployed in fixed position thereon 35 a plurality of abrasive three-~; ?n~ional abrasive composites, each of the composites comprising abrasive SUBSTITUT~ SHE~T (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 ~ ~ 8 9 PCT~Sg4l0075q particles dispersed in a binder and having a substantially precise shape defined by a substantially distinct and discernible boundary which includes substantially specific dimensions, wherein the precise 5 shapes are not all identical.
In a further embodiment, substantially all of the aforesaid abrasive composites exist as pairs, each pair including two unmatched abrasive composites, one abrasive composite having a nonidentical shape to an 10 adjacent abrasive composite.
Yet another embodiment of this invention relates to an abrasive article wherein the aforesaid abrasive composites include a first abrasive composite having a first precise shape having specific first dimensions 15 and a second abrasive composite having a second precise shape and second specific dimensions wherein the first and the second specific dimensions are nonidentical.
In a further embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, the aforesaid first and second abrasive 20 composites each has a boundary defined by at least four planar surfaces wherein adjacent planar surfaces meet to define an edge of a certain length, wherein at least one edge of the first composite has a length which is different from the length of all edges of the second 25 composite. In one further embodiment, the length of the at least one edge of the first composite has a length which varies with respect to the length of any edge of the second composite in a ratio between 10:1 to 1:10, not inclusive of 1:1.
In another embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, the aforesaid first and second abrasive composites have a first and second geometrical shape, respectively, which are nonidentical. For example, the aforesaid first and second geometrical shapes can be 35 selected from different members of the group of geometrical shapes consisting of cubic, prismatic, SU~STITUTF SHEET (Rl~LE 26) WO9S/07797 2 1 7 0 q 8 9 PCT~S~4/00754 conical, truncated conical, cylindrical, pyramidal, and truncated pyramidal.
In another embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, each abrasive composite has a boundary 5 defined by at least four planar surfaces wherein adjacent planar surfaces meet at an edge to define an angle of intersection therebetween, wherein at least one angle of intersection of the the first abrasive composite is different from all of the angles of lO intersection of the second composite. In a preferred embodiment, no angle of intersection of adjacent planar surfaces in the first abrasive composite is equal to O
or 9O. In a further embodiment thereof, substantially all the abrasive composites have a pyramidal shape.
In another preferred embodiment of the invention, the surface of the abrasive article has a machine direction and opposite side edges, each side edge being parallel to the machine direction axis and each side edge being respectively within a first and second 20 imaginary plane each of which is perpendicular to the surface, a plurality of parallel elongate abrasive ridges deployed in fixed position on the surface, each ridge having a longitll~in~l axis located at its transverse center and exte~ing along an imaginary line 25 which intersects the first and second planes at an angle which is neither 0 nor 9O, and wherein each abrasive ridge comprises a plurality of the aforesaid three-dimensional abrasive composites which are intermittently spaced along the longitudinal axis.
In a further embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, the aforesaid plurality of parallel elongate abrasive ridges are deployed in first and second groups wherein the first and second groups are located at nonoverlapping locations in the in the 35 machine direction or in a direction perpendicular to the machine direction of the major surface, wherein the JTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095107797 ~ 70 q g q PCT~S94/00754 longitudinal axis of at least one abrasive ridge within the first group extends along an imaginary line that intersects with an imaginary line extending from at least one longit~inAl axis of an abrasive ridge in the 5 second group.
In yet another embodiment of the abrasive article of the present invention, each abrasive ridge has a distal end spaced from the surface and each distal end extends to a third imaginary plane which is spaced from 10 and parallel to the surface. For example, in one embodiment, the abrasive composites have the same height value measured from the surface to distal end in a range of from about 50 micrometers and about 1020 micrometers.
In another preferred embodiment of the abrasive article of the invention, abrasive composites are fixed on the major surface in a density of about 100 to about 10,000 abrasive composites/cm2. In one ~urther embodiment, substantially the entire surface area of 20 the major surface is covered by the abrasive composites.
In another embodiment of the invention relating to a method for making an abrasive article described herein, a method comprises the steps of:
(a) preparing an abrasive slurry wherein the abrasive slurry comprises a plurality of abrasive particles dispersed in a binder precursor;
(b) providing a backing having a front surface and a back surface; and a production tool provided with a plurality of cavities in at least one major surface thereof, each cavity having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernible boundary which includes specific dimensions, wherein the precise cavity shapes are not all identical;
SUB~T~TU T E SHEET (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 2 1 70~8~ PCT~S94/00754 (c) providing a means to apply the abrasive slurry into a plurality of the cavities of the production tool;
(d) contacting the front surface of the backing with the production tool such that the abrasive slurry wets the front surface;
(e) solidifying the binder precursor to form a binder, whereupon solidification the abrasive slurry is converted into a plurality of abrasive composites; and (f) separating the production tool from the backing after the solidifying to provide a plurality of abrasive composites as attached to the backing each having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernable boundary which include specific ~imenfiions, wherein the precise abrasive composite shapes are not all identical.
It is preferred that the six steps are carried out 20 in a continuous manner, thereby providing an efficient method of making a coated abrasive article.
Alternatively, this method can be practiced where the abrasive slurry can be applied to the backing instead of the production tool before contacting of the 25 coated backing with the cavitated side of the production tool to fill the cavities in same.
In still another embodiment, the abrasive composite described herein is used in a method to reduce the surface of a workpiece, having the steps of:
(a) bringing into frictional contact a workpiece surface and the above-described abrasive article; and (b) moving at least one of said abrasive article or said workpiece surface relative to the other such that the surface finish of said workpiece surface is reduced.
SUBSTlTU~E ~H~T (RU~E 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 In yet another embodiment, the invention relates to a production tool for making the aforesaid abrasive article, which comprises a sheet-like structure having a plurality of cavities formed on a major surface 5 thereof, each cavity having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernible boundary which includes specific dimensions, wherein the precise cavity shapes are not all identical.
In another embodiment of the invention, there is a 10 method of making a master, and the product of this method, which can be used to form the aforesaid production tool, said master having a major surface extending within a first imaginary plane, comprising the steps of:
(1) determining angles corresponding to facing right and left planar surfaces of adjacent three-dimensional shapes and wherein each of said angles has a value as measured between its planar surface and a plane which extends in a normal direction to said 20 master surface and contains an edge of said planar surface in contact with said surface, by the following substeps:
(i) selecting an angle value between, but not including, 0 and 90 to establish a first right half 25 angle of a first right planar surface of a first right-side three-dimensional shape with a random number generating means capable of randomly selecting an angle value between, but not including, 0 and 90;
(ii) selecting an angle value between, but 30 not including, 0 and 90 with said random number generating means to establish a first left half angle for a first left planar surface of a first left-side - three-dimensional shape facing said first right planar surface of said first right-side three-dimensional 35 shape;
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 709~9 PCT~S94/00754 ~
(iii) proc~ing along a first direction exten~ing linearly within said first imaginary plane to a second left planar surface of a second left-side three-dimensional shape located adjacent said first 5 left-side three-dimensional shape and using said random number generating means to select a value between, but not including, 0 and 90 to establish a second left planar angle for said second left planar surface;
(iv) using said random number generating 10 means to select a value between, but not including, O
and 90 for a second right planar surface of a second right-side three-dimensional shape facing said second left planar surface;
(v) proceeding along said first direction to 15 a third right-side three-dimensional shape located adjacent said second right-side three-dimensional shape;
(vi) repeating said substeps (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), and (v), in that sequence, at least once;
(2) repeating step (1) except that the angles are determined for left and right planar surfaces of adjacent three-dimensional shapes deployed in two adjacent rows in a second direction extending linearly within said first imaginary plane, wherein said first 25 and second directions intersect;
(3) using means to determine, for a given width of said surface of said master, locations of grooves required to be cut by a cutting means to form a series of intersecting grooves defining a plurality of precise 30 three-dimensional shapes having said angles calculated by steps (1) and (2); and (4) providing a cutting means to cut grooves in said surface of said master in correspondence to said angles calculated by steps (1) and (2) and said groove 35 locations determined by step (3) to form a series of intersecting grooves which define a plurality of SUBSTlTUT~ SH~T (P~U~E 25) W095/07797 2 ~ 7 ~ 9 ~ 9 PCT~S94/00754 precise three-dimensional shapes upraised from said surface, each of said precise shapes being defined by a distinct and discernible boundary including specific dimensions, wherein not all said three-dimensional 5 shapes are identical. This master can then be used to form the aforsaid production tool such as by applying a molten polymer onto the master surface, solidifying the polymer and removing the production tool having a surface cont~A;n;ng cavities having shapes in counter-10 correspondence to the projections on the mastersurface.
Preferably, in this aspect of the invention, the right and left half angles of the projections formed in the master surface each have a value between 8O and 45O
15 and the three-dimensional shapes comprise pyramids.
Other features, advantages, and constructs of the invention will be better understood from the following description of figures and the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
BRIBF DE8CRIP~ION OF THE DRAWING8 Fig. 1 is an end sectional view representing one embodiment of an abrasive article of this invention.
Fig. 2 is an end sectional view representing another embodiment of an abrasive article of this 2 5 invention.
Fig. 3 is a side schematic view showing an apparatus for making an abrasive article according to this invention.
Fig. 4 is a side schematic view showing an 30 alternate apparatus for making an abrasive article according to this invention.
Fig. 5 is a ScAnn;ng Electron Microscope (SEM) photomicrograph taken at 45X of the top surface of an abrasive article of the invention having 355 micrometer 35 high pyramidal-shaped abrasive composites of varying ~;me~ion.
SlJBSTl~UTE SHEEr (Rl~L~ 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 7~989 PCT~S94/007S4 ~
Fig. 6 is a SEM photomicrograph taken at 25X of the top surface of a polypropylene production tool of the present invention having about 355 micrometer deep pyramidal-shaped cavities of varying dimensions.
Fig. 7 is a plane view in schematic of a production tool of the invention.
Fig. 8 is a schematic plane view of the topography of an abrasive article of the present invention having pyramidal shapes for all the abrasive composites, 10 wherein adjacent shapes have the same height but different side angles.
DETAILED DE~CRIPTION
The abrasive article of the invention exhibits a high rate of cut while imparting a relatively level, 15 fine surface finish on the workpiece being abraded and does not readily scribe the workpiece. While not desiring to be bound to any theory at this time, it is hypothesized that an array of abrasive composites having perfect pitch, i.e., an array of abrasive 20 composites that are all identical in dimensions, may generate a vibrational resonance, whereby the working abrasive article surface may reach a resonant vibration state which can cause surface finish problems, known as chatter marks. In the present invention, it is believed 25 that the variation in the dimensions between adjacent precisely-shaped abrasive composites disrupts and/or prevents such vibrational resonance from developing to thus provide a high cut-rate, fine finish with decreased chatter incidence in addition to decreased 30 scribing.
For purposes of this invention, the expression "precisely-shaped", or the like, as used herein in describing the abrasive composites, refers to abrasive composites having a shape that has been formed by 35 curing the curable binder of a flowable mixture of abrasive particles and curable binder while the mixture SIJBSTITIJT~ SHE~T (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 ¦ 7 0! ~ $ q PCT~S94/00754 is both being borne on a backing and filling a cavity on the surface of a production tool. Such a "precisly shaped" abrasive composite would thus have precisely the same shape as that of the cavity. Further, the 5 precise shape of the abrasive composite is defined by relatively smooth-surfaced sides that are bounded and joined by well-defined sharp edges having distinct edge lengths with distinct endpoints defined by the intersections of the various sides with the proviso 10 that at least one of said abrasive composites has at least one dimension which is different from that of an adjacent abrasive composite or composites.
For purposes of this invention, the term "boundary", as used herein to define the abrasive 15 composites, means the exposed surfaces and edges of each abrasive composite that delimit and define the actual three-dimensional shape of each abrasive composite. These distinct and discernible boundaries are readily visible and clear when a cross-section of 20 the abrasive article of the invention is examined under a microscope such as a scanning electron microscope.
The distinct and discernible boundaries of each abrasive composite form the cross-sectional outlines and contours of the precise shapes of the present 25 invention. These boundaries separate and distinguish one abrasive composite from another even when the abrasive composites abutt each other along a common border at their bases. By comparison, in an abrasive composite that does not have a precise shape, the 30 boundaries and edges are not definitive, e.g., where the abrasive composite sags before completion of its curing.
- For purposes of this invention, the term "dimension", as used in connection with defining the 35 abrasive composites, means a measure of spatial extent such as an edge length of a side surface (inclusive of SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 7~989 PCT~S94/007S4 the base) of the shape associated with an abrasive composite or, alternatively, the "dimension" can mean a measure of an angle of inclination of a side surface ex~en~;ng from the backing. Therefore, for purposes of 5 this invention, a "dimension" that is "different" for two different abrasive composites, means an edge length or an angle of intersection made at the meeting edge of two planar surfaces of a shape of a first abrasive composite that is nowhere duplicated in value by any of 10 the edge lengths or angles of intersections defining the shape of a second abrasive composite in the array.
These first and second abrasive composites can be adjacent in a preferred embodiment.
For purposes of this invention, the terminology 15 "geometrical shape" means a basic category of three-dimensional regular geometrical shape, such as cubic, pyramidal, pyrismatic, conical, cylindrical, truncated pyramidal, truncated conical and the like.
For purposes of this invention, the terminology 20 "adjacent composite" or "adjacent composites", or the like, as used herein, means at least two neighboring composites which lack any intervening abrasive composite structure located on a direct line therebetween.
Referring to Figure 1 for illustrative purposes, the side view of the abrasive article 10 shows a backing 11 having a pair of opposite side edges 19 (one shown), a machine direction axis (not shown) would extend parallel to the direction of said side edges 19 30 for purposes of this illustration, and a plurality of abrasive composites 12 fixed to at least the top surface 16 of the backing. The abrasive composites 12 comprise a plurality of abrasive particles 13 dispersed in the binder 14. Each abrasive composite has a 35 discernible precise shape. It is preferred that the abrasive particles do not protrude beyond the planar SUBSTiTUTE Sl~EET (RIJLE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 surface planes 15 of the shape before the coated abrasive article is put into service. As the coated abrasive article is being used to abrade a surface, the composite breaks down revealing unused abrasive 5 particles.
In one aspect of the invention, viz., where the abrasive composites are spaced-apart at constant pitch (constant peak- to-peak distance from centers of adjacent abrasive composites), the "adjacent composite"
10 will involve one nearest neighboring composite or multiple nearest neighboring composites equidistantly spaced from the abrasive composite which has the diffe~ent dimension thereto. However, in another aspect of the invention, if the abrasive composites are spaced 15 at a varied pitch, then it is possible, in that instance, for the "adjacent composite" to involve an abrasive composite which is not necessarily the closest composite as spaced from the abrasive composite having the different dimension thereto, as long as no 20 intervening abrasive structure is located on a direct line t:herebetween.
Backin~
~ backing can be conveniently used in this invention to provide a surface for deploying the 25 abrasive composites thereon, wherein such a backing has a front and back surface and can be any conventional abrasive backing. Examples of such include polymeric film, primed polymeric film, cloth, paper, vulcanized fiber, nonwovens, and combinations thereof. The backing 30 optionally may be a reinforced thermoplastic backing, such as described in the assignee's co-pending United States application No. 07/811,547 (Stout et al., filed 20 December 1991) or an endless belt as described in the assignee's co-pending U.S. application No.
35 07/919,541 (Benedict et al., filed 20 December 1991).
The backing may also contain a treatment or treatments S~BSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 to seal the backing and/or modify some physical properties of the backing. These treatments are well known in the art.
The backing may also have an attachment means on 5 its back surface to secure the resulting coated abrasive to a support pad or back-up pad. This attachment means can be a pressure sensitive adhesive or a loop fabric for a hook and loop attachment.
Alternatively, there may be a intermeshing attachment 10 system, such as described in the U.S. Patent No.
5,201,101 (Rouser et al.).
The back side of the abrasive article may also contain a slip resistant or frictional coating. An example of such a coating include compositions 15 containing an inorganic particulate (e.g., calcium carbonate or quartz) dispersed in an adhesive. An antistatic coating comprising materials such as carbon black or vanadium oxide also may be included in the abrasive article, if desired.
20 Abrasive Composit~
a. Abrasive ParticlQs The abrasive particles typically have a particle size ranging from about 0.1 to 1500 micrometers, usually between about 0.1 to 400 micrometers, 25 preferably between 0.1 to 100 micrometers and more preferably between 0.1 to 50 micrometers. It is preferred that the abrasive particles have a Mohs' hardness of at least about 8, more preferably above 9.
Examples of such abrasive particles include fused 30 aluminum oxide (which includes brown aluminum oxide, heat treated aluminum oxide, and white aluminum oxide), ceramic aluminum oxide, green silicon carbide, silicon carbide, chromia, alumina zirconia, diamond, iron oxide, ceria, cubic boron nitride, boron carbide, 35 garnet, and combinations thereof.
S~JBSTITUTE SHEET (~ULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 The term abrasive particles also encompasses when single abrasive particles are bonded together to form an abrasive agglomerate. Suitable abrasive agglomerates for this invention are further described 5 in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,311,489 (Kressner); 4,652,275 (Bloecher et al.) and 4,799,939 (Bloecher et al.).
It is also within the scope of this invention to have a surface coating on the abrasive particles. The surface coating may have many different functions. In 10 some instances the surface coatings increase adhesion to the binder, alter the abrading characteristics of the abrasive particle, and the like. Examples of surface coatings include coupling agents, halide salts, metal oxides including silica, refractory metal 15 nitri~des, refractory metal carbides, and the like.
In the abrasive composite there may also be diluent particles. The particle size of these diluent particles may be on the same order of magnitude as the abrasive particles. Examples of such diluent particles 20 include gypsum, marble, limestone, flint, silica, glass bubbles, glass beads, aluminum silicate, and the like.
b. Binder The abrasive particles are dispersed in an organic binder to form the abrasive composite. The organic 25 binder can be a thermoplastic binder, however, it is preferably a thermosetting binder. The binder is formed from a binder precursor. During the manufacture of the abrasive article, the thermosetting binder precursor is exposed to an energy source which aids in the 30 initiation of the polymerization or curing process.
Examples of energy sources include thermal energy and radiation energy which includes electron beam, - ultraviolet light, and visible light. After this polymerization process, the binder precursor is 35 converted into a solidified binder. Alternatively for a thermoplastic binder precursor, during the S~STlTlJTE SHE~ (RULE 26) WO95/07797 ~ t ~ ~: 9 8 q PCT~S94/00754 ~
manufacture of the abrasive article the thermoplastic binder precursor is cooled to a degree that results in solidification of the binder precursor. Upon solidification of the binder precursor, the abrasive 5 composite is formed.
The binder in the abrasive composite is generally also responsible for adhering the abrasive composite to the front surface of the backing. However, it some instances there may be an additional adhesive layer 10 between the front surface of the backing and the abrasive composite.
There are two main classes of thermosetting resins, condensation curable and addition polymerized resins. The preferred binder precursors are addition 15 polymerized resin because they are readily cured by exposure to radiation energy. Addition polymerized resins can polymerize through a cationic ~?ch~nism or a free radical m~r-h~n;~m. Depending upon the energy source that is utilized and the binder precursor 20 chemistry, a curing agent, initiator, or catalyst is sometimes preferred to help initiate the polymerization.
Examples of typical binders precursors include phenolic resins, urea-formaldehyde resins, melamine 25 formaldehyde resins, acrylated urethanes, acrylated epoxies, ethylenically unsaturated compounds, aminoplast derivatives having pendant unsaturated carbonyl groups, isocyanurate derivatives having at least one pendant acrylate group, isocyanate 30 derivatives having at least one pendant acrylate group, vinyl ethers, epoxy resins, and mixtures and combinations thereof. The term acrylate encompasses acrylates and methacrylates.
Phenolic resins are widely used in abrasive 35 article binders because of their thermal properties, availability, and cost. There are two types of SUBSTITUTE SHEET ~RI tLE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 ~ 9 PCT~S94/00754 phenolic resins, resole and novolac. Resole phenolic resins have a molar ratio of formaldehyde to phenol greater than or equal to one to one, typically between 1.5:1.0 to 3.0:1Ø Novolac resins have a molar ratio 5 of formaldehyde to phenol of less than one to one.
Examples of commercially available phenolic resins include those known by the tradenames "Durez" and "Varcum" from occidental Chemicals Corp.; "Resinox"
from Monsanto; "Aerofene" from Ashland Chemical Co. and 10 "Aerotap" from Ashland Chemical Co.
~ crylated urethanes are diacrylate esters of hydroxy terminated NCO extended polyesters or polyethers. Examples of commercially available acrylated urethanes include uvll~nANE 782, available 15 from Morton Thiokol Chemical, and CMD 6600, CMD 8400, and CMD 8805, available from Radcure Specialties.
Acrylated epoxies are diacrylate esters of epoxy resins, such as the diacrylate esters of bisphenol A
epoxy resin. Examples of commercially available 20 acry~ated epoxies include CMD 3500, CMD 3600, and CMD
3700, available from Radcure Specialities.
Ethylenically unsaturated resins include both monom~ric and polymeric compounds that contain atoms of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, and optionally, nitrogen 25 and the halogens. Oxygen or nitrogen atoms or both are generally present in ether, ester, urethane, amide, and urea groups. Ethylenically unsaturated compounds preferably have a molecular weight of less than about 4,000 and are preferably esters made from the reaction 30 of compounds containing aliphatic monohydroxy groups or aliphatic polyhydroxy groups and unsaturated carboxylic acids, such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, and the like. Representative examples of acrylate resins 35 include methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate styrene, divinylbenzene, vinyl toluene, ethylene glycol SUBST~TUTE S~EET (Rl~LE 26~
W095/07797 2 ~ q PCT~S94/007S4 diacrylate, ethylene glycol methacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, glycerol triacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol 5 methacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate and pentaerythritol tetraacrylate. Other ethylenically unsaturated resins include monoallyl, polyallyl, and polymethallyl esters and amides of carboxylic acids, such as diallyl phthalate, diallyl adipate, and 10 N,N-diallyladipamide. Still other nitrogen containing compounds include tris(2-acryloyl oxyethyl)iso-cyanurate, 1,3,5-tri(2-methyacryloxyethyl)- s-triazine, acrylamide, methylacrylamide, N-methylacrylamide, N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-vinylpyrrolidone, and 15 N-vinylpiperidone.
The aminoplast resins have at least one pendant alpha, beta-unsaturated carbonyl group per molecule or oligomer. These unsaturated carbonyl groups can be acrylate, methacrylate, or acrylamide type groups.
20 Examples of such materials include N-hydroxymethyl)-acrylamide, N,N'-oxydimethylene-bisacrylamide, ortho and para acrylamidomethylated phenol, acrylamido-methylated phenolic novolac, and combinations thereof.
Examples of these materials are further described in 25 U.S. Patent No. 4,903,440 (Larson et al.) and U.S.
Patent No. 5,236,472 (Kirk et al.).
Isocyanurate derivatives having at least one pendant acrylate group and isocyanate derivatives having at least one pendant acrylate group are further 30 described in U.S. Patent 4,652,274 (80ettcher et al.).
The preferred isocyanurate material is a triacrylate of tris(hydroxy ethyl) isocyanurate.
Epoxy resins have an oxirane and are polymerized by the ring opening. Such epoxide resins include 35 monomeric epoxy resins and oligomeric epoxy resins.
Examples of some preferred epoxy resins include SUBST~T~T~ S~EET (RUL~ 26) ~ WO 95/07797 2 1 7 0 q 8 9 PCT/US94/007S4 2,2-bis[4- (2,3-epoxypropoxy)-phenyl propane]
(diglycidyl ether of bisphenol A) and commercially available materials under the trade designation "Epon 828", "Epon 1004", and "Epon 1001F" available from 5 Shell Chemical Co., "DER-331'1, "DER-332", and "DER-334"
available from Dow Chemical Co. Other suitable epoxy resins include glycidyl ethers of phenol formaldehyde novolac (e.g., "DEN-431" and "DEN-428" available from Dow Chemical Co.).
The epoxy resins of the invention can polymerize via a cationic mechanism with the addition of an appropriate cationic curing agent. Cationic curing agents generate an acid source to initiate the polymerization of an epoxy resin. These cationic 15 curing agents can include a salt having an onium cation and a halogen cont~;ning a complex anion of a metal or metalloid. Other cationic curing agents include a salt having an organometallic complex cation and a halogen containing complex anion of a metal or metalloid which 20 are further described in U.S. Patent 4,751,138 (Tumey et al.) (column 6, line 65 to column 9, line 45).
Another example is an organometallic salt and an onium salt is described in U.S. Patent 4,985,340 (Palazzotto) (column 4 line 65 to column 14 line 50); European 25 Patent Applications 306,161 and 306,162. Still other cationic curing agents include an ionic salt of an organometallic complex in which the metal is selected from the elements of Periodic Group IVB, VB, VIB, VIIB
and VIIIB which is described in European Patent 30 Applications i09~851.
Regarding free radical curable resins, in some instances it is preferred that the abrasive slurry further comprise a free radical curing ~gent. However in the case of an electron beam energy source, the 35 curing agent is not always required because the electron beam itself generates free radicals.
~BSTIT~IT~ ~H~E~ (Rl~E 26) W095/07797 ~ t 7~ PCT~S94/00754 Examples of free radical thermal initiators include peroxides, e.g., benzoyl peroxide, azo compounds, benzophenones, and quinones. For either ultraviolet or visible light energy source, this curing 5 agent is sometimes referred to as a photoinitiator.
Examples of initiators, that when exposed to ultraviolet light generate a free radical source, include but are not limited to those selected from the group consisting of organic peroxides, azo compounds, 10 quinones, benzophenones, nitroso compounds, acryl halides, hydrozones, mercapto compounds, pyrylium compounds, triacrylimidazoles, bisimidazoles, chloroalkytriazines, benzoin ethers, benzil ketals, thioxanthones, and acetophenone derivatives, and 15 mixtures thereof. Examples of initiators that when exposed to visible radiation generate a free radical source, can be found in U.S. Patent No. 4,735,632 (Oxman et al.), entitled Coated Abrasive Binder Containing Ternary Photoinitiator System. The 20 preferred initiator for use with visible light is "Irgacure 369" commercially available from Ciba Geigy Corporation.
The weight ratios between the abrasive particles and binder can range between 5 to 95 parts abrasive 25 particles to 5 to 95 parts binder; more typically, 50 to 90 parts abrasive particles and 10 to 50 parts binder.
c. Additives The abrasive slurry can further comprise optional 30 additives, such as, for example, fillers (including grinding aids), fibers, lubricants, wetting agents, thixotropic materials, surfactants, pigments, dyes, antistatic agents, coupling agents, plasticizers, and suspending agents. The amounts of these materials are 35 selected to provide the properties desired. The use of these can affect the erodability of the abrasive SlJB~TITUTE SHEF~ (RU! E 26) ~ W095/07797 2 ~ ~9~9 PCT~S94/00754 composite. In some instances an additive is purposely added to make the abrasive composite more erodable, thereby expelling dulled abrasive particles and exposing new abrasive particles.
Examples of useful fillers for this invention include: metal carbonates (such as calcium carbonate {such as chalk, calcite, marl, travertine, marble and limestone}, calcium magnesium carbonate, sodium carbonate, magnesium carbonate), silica {such as 10 quart:z, glass beads, glass bubbles and glass fibers}
silicates {such as talc, clays, montmorillonite, feldspar, mica, calcium silicate, calcium metasilicate, sodium aluminosilicate, sodium silicate}, metal sulfates {such as calcium sulfate, barium sulfate, 15 sodium sulfate, aluminum sodium sulfate, aluminum sulfate}, gypsum, vermiculite, wood flour, aluminum trihydrate, carbon black, metal oxides {such as calcium oxide or lime, aluminum oxide, titanium oxide}, and metal sulfites {such as calcium sulfite}.
The term filler also encompasses materials that are known in the abrasive industry as grinding aids. A
grinding aid is defined as particulate material that the addition of which has a significant effect on the chemical and physical processes of abrading which 25 results in improved performance. Examples of chemical groups of grinding aids include waxes, organic halide compounds, halide salts and metals and their alloys.
The organic halide compounds will typically break down during abrading and release a halogen acid or a gaseous 30 halide compound. Examples of such materials include chlorinated waxes like tetrachloronaphtalene, pentachloronaphthalene; and polyvinyl chloride.
Examples of halide salts include sodium chloride, potassium cryolite, sodium cryolite, ammonium cryolite, 35 potassium tetrafluoroboate, sodium tetrafluoroborate, silicon fluorides, potassium chloride, magnesium SlJBST~TUT~ SH~T (Rl~L~ 2~) WO95/07797 2`t I-Q~q PCT~S94/00754 ~
chloride. Examples of metals include, tin, lead, bismuth, cobalt, antimony, cadmium, iron, and titanium.
Other miscellaneous grinding aids include sulfur, organic sulfur compounds, graphite, and metallic 5 sulfides.
Examples of antistatic agents include graphite, carbon black, vanadium oxide, humectants, and the like.
These antistatic agents are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,061,294 (Harmer et al.); 5,137,542 (Buch~n~n et 10 al.), and 5,203,884 (Bur-h~An et al.).
A coupling agent can provide an association bridge between the binder precursor and the filler particles or abrasive particles. Examples of coupling agents include silanes, titanates, and zircoaluminates. The 15 abrasive slurry preferably contains anywhere from about 0.01 to 3% by weight coupling agent.
An example of a suspending agent is an amorphous silica particle having a surface area less than 150 meters square/gram that is commercially available from 20 DeGussa Corp., under the trade name "OX-50".
Abrasive ComDosita 8hape Each abrasive composite has a precise shape associated with it. The precise shape is delimited by a distinct and discernible boundary, these terms being 25 defined hereinabove. These distinct and discernible boundaries are readily visible and clear when a cross-section of the abrasive article of the invention is P~m; ned under a microscope such as a scanning electron microscope, e.g., as shown in Figure 5. The distinct 30 and discernible boundaries of each abrasive composite form the outline or contour of the precise shapes of the present invention. These boundaries separate and distinguish one abrasive composite from another even when the abrasive composites abutt each other along a 35 common border at their bases.
S~lBSTlT~lTE SHtE~ (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7~ PCT~S~4/007s4 In comparison, in an abrasive composite that does not have a precise shape, the boundaries and edges are not definitive, e.g., where the abrasive composite sags before completion of its curing. Thus, the expression 5 "precisely-shaped", or the like, as used herein in describing the abrasive composites, also refers to abrasive composites having a shape that has been formed by curing the curable binder of a flowable mixture of abrasive particles and curable binder while the mixture 10 is both being borne on a backing and filling a cavity on the surface of a production tool. Such a precisly shaped abrasive composite would thus have precisely the same shape as that of the cavity. These cavities in a production tool are depicted in Figure 6.
A plurality of such composites provide three-dimensional shapes that project outward from the surface of the backing in an inverse pattern to that presented by the production tool. Each composite is defined by a well-defined boundary or perimeter, the 20 base portion of the boundary being the interface with the backing to which the precisely shaped composite is adhered. The remaining portion of the boundary is defined as the inverse shape of the cavity in the surface of the production tool in which the composite 25 is cured. The entire outer surface of the composite is confined, either by the backing or by the cavity, during its formation. Suitable methods and techniques for forming precisely-shaped composites are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,152,917 (Pieper et al.).
This invention departs from U.S. Patent No.
5,152,917 (Pieper et al.), however, insofar as the provision of differing dimensioned shapes, among other things, in the array of abrasive composites. This proviso can be established by any convenient approach, 35 e.g., by arbitrarily assigning at least one dimensional variance, such as defined hereinbelow, between adjacent SUB~TITU~E SHE~T (R~LE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 ~ 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 ~
composite shapes in a portion or the whole of the array of composites for an abrasive article. An array of grooves can be formed in a surface of a master tool, e.g., by use of a diamond turning machine, from which 5 is produced a production tool having an array of cavity shapes, which, in turn, can receive and mold an abrasive slurry described herein, which are the inverse shape of the predetermined array of abrasive composite shapes. Alternatively, as described herein, a copy of a 10 desired pattern of variably dimensioned shapes of abrasive composites can be formed in the surface of a so-called metal master, e.g., aluminum, copper, bronze, or a plastic master such as acrylic plastic, either of which can be nickel-plated after grooving, as by 15 diamond turning grooves to leave upraised portions corresponding to the desired predetermined shapes of the abrasive composites. Then, flexible plastic production tooling can be formed, in general, from the master by a method explained in U.S. Patent No.
20 5,152,917 (Pieper et al). As a result, the plastic production tooling has a surface which includes indentations having the inverse shape of the abrasive composites to be formed therewith. Alternatively, the metal master can be manufactured by diamond turning 25 grooves to leave the desired shapes in a metal surface which is amenable to diamond turning, such as aluminum, copper or bronze, and then nickel plating the grooved surface to provide the metal master. Exemplary terh~iques for making the varying dimensioned abrasive 30 composites will be described in greater detail hereinbelow.
Regarding the construction of the abrasive composites per se, referring to Figure 1 for illustrative purposes, the abrasive composite 12 has a 35 boundary 15. The boundary or boundaries associated with the shape result in one abrasive composite being SUBST~ITE SHEET ~RllLE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 ~ 70989 PCT~S94/00754 physically separated to some extent from another adjacent abrasive composite. To form an individual abrasive composite, a portion of the boundaries forming the shape of the abrasive composite must be separated 5 from one another. Note that in Figure 1, the base or a portion of the abrasive composite closest to the backing can abutt with an adjacent abrasive composite.
Referring to Figure 2, the abrasive article 20 of the invention comprises a backing 21 having a plurality of 10 abrasive composites 22 bonded to the backing. The abrasive composites comprises a plurality of abrasive particles 23 that are dispersed in a binder 24. In this aspect of the invention, there are open spaces 25 between adjacent composites. It is also within the 15 scope of this invention to have a combination of abrasive composites bonded to a backing in which some of adjacent abrasive composites abutt, while other adjac~ent abrasive composites have open spaces between them.
In some instances, e.g., pyramidal non-cylindrical shapes, the boundaries forming the sides of the shape also are planar. For such shapes that have multiple planes, there are at least four planes (inclusive of three sides and the bottom or base). The number of 25 planes for a given shape can vary depending upon the desired geometry, for instance the number of planes can range from four to over 20. Generally, there are between four to ten planes, preferably between four to six planes. These planes intersect to form the desired 30 shape and the angles at which these planes intersect will determine the shape dimensions. Referring to Figure 1, the abrasive composite 12 has a boundary 15 which is planar. The side planes 15A and 15b intersect at an angle ~, with cross-section 15C facing the viewer 35 and is coplanar with the page.
SU~STITUTE SHEEr (RUL~ 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 ~ 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 ~
A key aspect of this invention is that at least one the abrasive composites has a different dimension from another abrasive composite in the array.
Preferably, the different dimension is established 5 between at least one pair of adjacent composites, and even more preferably, established for each and every pair of adjacent composites provided on the surface of the abrasive article. The terminology of "every pair"
of adjacent composites encompasses an arbitrary 10 consideration of every composite on the surface of the abrasive article as paired with its adjacent composite.
In general, at least 10% of the pairs of adjacent composites have a different dimension therebetween, preferably at least 30%, more preferably at least 50%.
15 Most preferably, substantially 100% of the abrasive composites have a different ~; e~ion from its respective paired adjacent abrasive composite. The result of this proviso of different dimensions between abrasive composites, viz. between adjacent pairs of 20 abrasive composites, results in an abrasive article that produces a relatively finer surface finish on the workpiece being abraded or refined. Since the ~i ^ncions of adjacent abrasive composites vary, there is a reduced tendency for scribed grooves to be 2S imparted by the precisely abrasive composites into the workpiece surface. In general, if less than 10% of the pairs of abrasive composites have an adjacent composite that has a different dimension, the effect of the invention of decreasing scribing while achieving high-30 cut rates and fine finishes may not be satisfactorilyrealized. In general, the number of pairs of adjacent abrasive composites that have different dimensions is selected to minimize or reduce scribing. The percentage of the total abrasive composites that this number of 35 pairs represents will depend upon several factors such as the workpiece type, abrading interface pressure, SUBSTiTUTE SHEET (R~LE 26) ~ T ~0 q g 9 W095/07797 PCT~S94/007S4 abrasive article rotation speed and other typical abrading conditions.
It is within the scope of this invention to have some, but never all, of the abrasive composites present 5 on the surface which have identical shapes. However, the abrasive composites having identical shapes, if present, preferably should not be located directly adjacent to or next to one another in order to fully realize the benefits of the invention. For instance, 10 two abrasive composites in the abrasive article may have shapes defined by same dimensions, but, preferably, the two abrasive composites should be separated from one another in the array of composites by at least one intervening abrasive composite that 15 differs in a dimension from each.
There must be at least one dimension associated with at least one of the abrasive composites that is different from another abrasive composite. However, it also is within the scope of this invention that there 20 are two or more different dimensions therebetween.
These dimensions can be varied in a variety of ways, such as by providing a different length of an edge at the intersection of two planar surfaces of a shape of a composite; by providing a different angle formed at the 25 meeting edge of two adjacent planar surfaces of a shape of a composite; or by providing different types of geometrical shapes for the abrasive composites to provide either a different edge length and/or a different angle.
If an edge length is varied to provide the different dimension for purposes of the invention, in one embodiment, the length or dimensions of the edges in composites, particularly adjacent composites, each having a pyramidal shape as the geometrical shape and a 35 common height of between 25 and 1020 micrometers, generally can differ from at least about 1 to about 500 SllBS~lTlJ~E SH~El (R~LE 26) W095/07797 ~ PCT~S94/007S4 micrometers, and more preferably between 5 to 250 micrometers. In one embodiment, the length of the at least one edge of a first composite in the array has a length which varies with respect to the length of any 5 edge of a second composite in a ratio ~etween lO:1 to 1:10, not inclusive of 1:1, and preferably as between two adjacent composites.
More generally, the abrasive composite shape of this invention can be any convenient shape, but it is 10 preferably a three-dimensional regular geometric shape such as a cubic, prismatic (e.g., triangular, quadrilateral, hexagonal, etc.), conical, truncated conical (flat top), cylindrical, pyramidal, truncated pyramidal (flat top) and the like. The geometrical 15 shape of adjacent abrasive composites can be varied, e.g. pyramidal next to prismatic, in order to provide the requisite dimensional variance therebetween. In one embodiment of the invention, the shapes of the abrasive composites, e.g., pyramidal, all are provided with the 20 same total height value, measured from the backing, in a range of from about 50 micrometers to about 1020 micrometers.
A preferred geometrical shape is a pyramid and the pyramid can be a four or five side sided (inclusive of 25 the base) pyramid. In one preferred embodiment, all composite shapes are pyramidal. Even more preferably, the dimensional variance is achieved between adjacent pyramidal-shaped composites by varying the angle formed by a side surface with the backing in adjacent 30 pyramids. For example, angles ~ and ~ formed by the sides of adjacent pyramidal shaped composites, such as depicted in Figure 1, are different angles from each other and each have a value of between 0 and 90 (i.e.
non-inclusive of 0 and 90). Preferably, the angle 35 or ~ formed between a side surface of the pyramidal-shaped composites and an imaginary plane 17 (Figure 1) SUBSTlTUT~ SHEEr (R~LE 26) ~ W095/077g7 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 ext~n~;ng normal to the intersection of the respective side surface and the backing should be greater than or equal to 8, but less than or equal to 45. From a practical standpoint, angles less than 8 may release 5 cured composite shapes from the production tool with greater difficulty. On the other hand, angles greater than 45 may unduly enlarge the spacing between adjacent abrasive composites such that insufficient abrading surfaces are provided over the area of the 10 backing.
It also is preferable to select angles for ~ and wherein each have a value between 0 and 90 and which differ in magnitude by at least about 1, and more preferably at least about 5.
It is also preferred to form pyramidal shapes for the abrasive composites where two side surfaces of each pyramid meet at the apex of each pyramid to form a material-included angle ~ (see Figure 1) in a cross-sectional view of the pyramid having a value of greater 20 than or equal to 25 and less than or equal to 90. The lower value of 25 may be a practical limit since it can be difficult to form a peak or apex shape for an abrasive composite which is sharp and less than 25 with the slurry and production tool methodology 25 described herein. To more fully realize the benefits of the invention, this proviso with respect to material-included angle ~ should be used together with the above-mentioned proviso that intervening angles and ~ between adjacent composites be provided as 30 different and randomly selected between oo and 90O as explained hereinabove.
Further, in any individual abrasive composite, the angles made by the various surface planes with the backing do not necessarily have to be the same for a 35 given composite. For instance in a four sided pyramid (one base and three side surfaces), the angles formed SlJBST~TUTE SH~T (RU~ 26) WOg~/07797 ~Q~ PCT~S94/007S4 by any of the first, second and third side planes with the backing can be different from each other.
Naturally, the angle at which the side surfaces intersect with each other will also vary as the angle 5 formed between the side surface and the backing are varied.
Also, in the embodiment of this invention where the dimensional variance between adjacent composites is established by varying side surface angles between lO adjacent abrasive composites, such as angles ~ and ~
(Figure 1), it is preferred that the respective angles chosen for each of ~ and ~ between adjacent composites are not repeated and constant throughout the array of abrasive composites, which is believed to even further 15 ensure no resonance is created between the workpiece and the abrasive article. Therefore, it is more desirable to permit and provide different values for each of ~ and ~ between 0 and 90 as one proceeds from one pair adjacent composites to the next immediate pair 20 of adjacent composites along either the widthwise or lengthwise direction of the abrasive article (e.g., see Figure 8). This change in the values of a and ~ between different sets of adjacent composites in the array can be effected in any convenient manner, such as by 25 randomly picking the values for each of ~ and ~ between the range O and 90 degrees.
For example, if ~, as the right half angle (Figure 1), can be randomly selected in the range of between 0 and 90 for an abrasive composite in one row of 30 composites, then ~, as the left half angle facing ~, is randomly chosen for the adjacent abrasive composite in the adjacent row of composites; and then, as one preceeds to the next pair of adjacent abrasive composites in either the widthwise or lengthwise 35 direction along the rows of composites in the array, a new ~, as left half angle, is randomly selected between SUBST~TUT~ SHEET (Rl~LI~ 26~
~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 0 and 90 degrees and then a new value for a, as the facing right half angle, of the adjacent composite can be randomly selected in the range of 0 to 90 degrees, and so forth throughout the array. This practice is 5 desirable in order to provide a more uniform distribution of angles between 0 and 90 degrees throughout the array of abrasive composites in the article.
The actual selection of the angles ~ and ~, and ~, 10 throughout the array of abrasive composites, randomly and subject to the preferred constraints described herein, can be accomplished in any convenient manner, for example, by systematic random selections of angle values by draw within the preferred numerical 15 constraint mentioned herein. These systematic selections for an array, can be facilitated and expedited by using a common computer, e.g. a desktop computer, using the angle constraints described herein to delimit the range of angle values from which the 20 computer makes a random choice. Algorithms for selection of random numbers are generally known in the statistical and computer fields, and have been adapted to this aspect of the invention. For instance, the well known linear congruential method for generating 25 pseudorandom numbers can be applied towards randomly selecting the angles ~ and ~. The application and implementation of random number generation for select:ing angles for the side faces of the abrasive composite shapes in the present application is 30 exemplified in the computer source code described in the APPENDIX hereinafter.
In any event, the angle values, once so selected for the abrasive composites in the array, can be used to determine and predicate the pattern and shapes of 35 indentations formed by a diamond turning machine in the surface of a metal production tool or production tool, S~IBSTITIJ~E SHEEl (RI~I~E 26) Wos~c7~7 ~ t ~8q PCT~S94/00754 which, in turn, can be used to make the abrasive composite articles of the invention by methods described herein.
In some instances it is preferred to have the 5 height and geometrical shape of all the composites as the same. This height is the distance of the abrasive composite from the backing to its outermost point before the abrasive article is used. If the height and shape are constant, it is then preferred to have the 10 angle between planes vary.
In order to achieve a fine surface finish on the workpiece, it is also preferred that the peaks of the abrasive composites do not align in a column which is parallel to the abrading direction performed in the 15 machine direction. If the abrasive composite peaks align in a column parallel to the abrading direction, this tends to result in grooves imparted to the workpiece and a coarser surface finish. Thus, it is preferred that the abrasive composites be offset from 20 one another to prevent this alignment.
In general there are at least 5 individual abrasive composites per square centimeter. In some instances, there may be at least about 100 individual abrasive composites/square centimeter or higher, and 25 more preferably, about 2,000 to 10,000 abrasive composites/square centimeter. There is no operational upper limit on the density of the abrasive composites;
although, from a practical standpoint, at some point it may not be possible to increase the cavity density 30 and/or form precisely shaped cavities in the surface of the production tooling preferably used to make the array of abrasive composites. In general, this number of abrasive composites result in an abrasive article that has a relatively high rate of cut, a long life, 35 but also results in a relatively fine surface finish on the workpiece being abraded. Additionally, with this SUBST~TUT~ SHE~ (RUL~ 26~
W095/07797 ~ 1 70~89 PCT~S94/00754 number of abrasive composites there is a relatively low unit force per each abrasive composite. In some instances, this can result in better, more consistent, breakdown of the abrasive composite.
5 Method of Ma~ing the Abr~sive Articla Although additional details will be described later herein on the methods of making the abrasive article of the invention, in general, the first step in making the abrasive article is to prepare an abrasive 10 slurry. The abrasive slurry is made by combining together by any suitable mixing technique the binder precursor, the abrasive particles, and the optional additives. Examples of mixing techniques include low shear and high shear mixing, with high shear mixing 15 being preferred. Ultrasonic energy may also be utilized in combination with the mixing step to lower the abrasive slurry viscosity. Typically, the abrasive particles are gradually added into the binder precursor. The amount of air bubbles in the abrasive 20 slurry can be minimized by pulling a vacuum during the mixing step, for example, by employing conventional vacuum-assisted methods and equipment.
In some instances it is preferred to heat, generally in the range of 30 to 70C, the abrasive 25 slurry to lower the viscosity. It is important the abrasive slurry have a rheology that coats well and in which the abrasive particles and other fillers do not settle.
If a thermosetting binder precursor is employed, 30 the energy source can be thermal energy or radiation energy depending upon the binder precursor chemistry.
If a thermoplastic binder precursor is employed the thermoplastic is cooled such that it becomes solidified and the abrasive composite is formed. Other more 35 detailed aspects of the method(s) to make the abrasive article of the invention will be described hereinbelow.
SUBST~TUTE SH~El (RU~ 2~) W095/07797 ~ ~ ~a~ PCT~S94/007S4 P~oduction Tool A production tool is important, from both practical and technological standpoints, in making an abrasive article of the invention, especially in view 5 of the relatively small sizes of the abrasive composites. The production tool contains a plurality of cavities. These cavities are essentially the inverse shape of the abrasive composite desired and are responsible for generating the shape of the abrasive lO composites. The dimensions of the cavities are selected to provide the desired shape and dimensions of the abrasive composites. If the shape or dimensions of the cavities are not properly fabricated, the resulting production tool will not provide the desired dimensions 15 for the abrasive composites.
The cavities can be present in a dot like pattern with spaces between adjacent cavities or the cavities can abutt against one another. The cavities butt up against one another to facilitate release of the shaped 20 and cured abrasive slurry. Additionally, the shape of the cavities is selected such that the cross-sectional area of the abrasive composite decreases in the direction away from the backing.
In a more preferred embodiment of the production 25 tool, the production tool has two opposing parallel side edges bounding an array of cavities so configured to provide differing dimensions in the shapes of adjacent abrasive composites formed therewith by methods described herein over a distinct segment of 30 length of the abrasive article, in either a length and/or width direction of the abrasive article, and then this predetermined pattern of differing composite shapes can be repeated at least once more or repeatedly along the length andtor width of the abrasive article, 35 if desired and convenient.
SUBSTIT~T~ StlEEr (RIJ~E 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 7~ ! PCT~S94/00754 For example, Figure 7 is a top view representation of a production tool 70 that can be used to make an abrasive article of the invention. The side edges 71 of the production tool are parallel to the machine 5 direction (not shown) of the production tool and are perpendicular to the transverse width direction of the production tool. Cavitites 74 are delimited by intersecting upraised portions represented by solid lines 72 and 73. The production tool has six distinct 10 groups A, B, C, D, E and F of cavities, wherein in each group the cavities are aligned in parallel rows bounded by upraised portions 72, wherein the upraised portions 72 and 73 are the nondeformed (noncavitated) remainder of the tooling sheet. These groups A-E are arranged 15 head-to-tail along the length of the tooling, as shown in Figure 7. The rows of cavities in each group that are aligned most closely with side edges 71 trace imaginary lines ext~nding at non-parallel (nonzero) angles to the machine direction of the production tool, 20 and which angles differ from group A to group B to group C, and so forth up to group F. The angles of the rows of cavities (and intervening upraised portions 72) made with the side edges 71 should be established as between 0 to 90. Scribing problems can arise at 25 either oo or 90 angles for rows of cavities with the side edges 71. Preferably, angles of 5 to 85 are selected for the angles of the rows of cavities with the machine direction more assuredly avoid scribing problems.
The angles of the rows of cavities preferably alternate between clockwise and counterclockwise directionality from group to group, as shown in Figure - 7. The angle formed between rows of cavities and upraised portions 72 and the side edges 71 can be 35 selected to be the same or different in absolute magnitude from set to set.
~STlTU~ SHEEr (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 ~ ~ ~ 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 An abrasive article formed with production tool 70 by methods described herein will have an array of abrasive composites formed in the inverse shape to the surface profile presented by the array of cavities in 5 the production tool, such production tool 70. By arranging rows of cavities at angles in the production tooling by means of arrangements such as exemplified in Figure 7, scribing effects can be minimized in the abrasive article made thereby.
Alternatively, the cavities in the production tool can be arranged to be laterally offset, i.e., nonaligned, from one another in the direction advancing parallel to the side edges of the production tool (nondepicted). That is, this embodiment provides an 15 optional manner of forming an array of abrasive composites and intervening grooves which are not arranged in rows which extend parallel to the the side edges of the abrasive article. Instead, the abrasive composites are staggered from each other and non-20 aligned when viewed from the front of the abrasivearticle into the direction parallel to the side edges of the abrasive article.
The production tool can be a belt, a sheet, a continuous sheet or web, a coating roll such as a 25 rotogravure roll, a sleeve mounted on a coating roll, or die. The production tool can be composed of metal, (e.g., nickel), metal alloys (e.g., nickel alloys), plastic (e.g., polypropylene, an acrylic plastic), or any other conveniently formable material. The metal 30 production tool can be fabricated by any conventional technique such as engraving, hobbing, electroforming, diamond turning, and the like.
A thermoplastic production tool can be made by replication off a metal master tool. The metal master 35 will have the inverse pattern desired for the production tool. The metal master can be made with the SUBSTITlJTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 ~ 9 ~ 9 PCT~S94/00754 same basic t~chn;ques useful in directly making the production tool, e.g., by diamond turning a metal surface. In the event of use of a met~l master, a thermoplastic sheet material can be heated and 5 optionally along with the metal master such that the thermoplastic material is embossed with the surface pattern presented by the metal master by pressing the two surfaces together. The thermoplastic can also be extruded or cast onto to the metal master and then 10 pressed. The thermoplastic material is cooled to solidify and produce the production tool. Examples of preferred thermoplastic production tool materials include polyester, polycarbonates, polyvinyl chloride, polypropylene, polyethylene and combinations thereof.
Alternatively, a plastic production tool can be directly made, without the need of a master by engraving or diamond turning a predetermined array of cavities, which have the inverse shape of the abrasive composites desired, into a surface of the plastic 20 sheet. If a thermoplastic production tool is utilized, then care must be taken not to generate excessive heat, particularly during the solidifying step, that may distort the thermoplastic production tool. Other suitable methods of production tooling and metal 25 masters are discussed in commonly assigned U.S. Patent Application No. 08/004,929 (Spurgeon et al.), filed 14 December 1993.
For example, a preferred method of making a polymeric production tool of the invention of the type 30 depicted in Figure 7 involves the use of a nickel-plated metal master configured in a drum form. Several flat sections of nickel-plated master, each about 30 centimeters in length, with the varied shapes of indentations corresponding to the shapes desired for 35 the abrasive composites are provided in a surface thereof, are produced by diamond turning with the aid SUBST~TUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W09~7/~7 ~ ~ ~Q~ PCT~S94/007S4 of a computer directing the cutting action performed by the diamond turning machine. These sections of metal master are welded together head-to-tail, with the grooves of section being at a non-zero angle to the 5 grooves of the next adjacent section. This chain of sections is then fixed to a drum so that the composites are continuous around the circumference of the drum.
Care should be taken to minimize any weld seams from distending out from between the sections and at the 10 point of joining. The production tool is cast by extruding polymeric resin onto the drum and passing the extrudant between a nip roll and the drum, and then cooling the extrudant to form a production tool in sheet form having an array of cavities formed on the 15 surface thereof in inverse correspondence to the surface indentations presented by the master on the drum. This process can be conducted continuously to produce a polymeric tool of any desired length.
EnerqY 8Ources When the abrasive slurry comprises a thermosetting binder precursor, the binder precursor is cured or polymerized. This polymerization is generally initiated upon exposure to an energy source. Examples of energy sources include thermal energy and radiation 25 energy. The amount of energy depends upon several factors such as the binder precursor chemistry, the dimensions of the abrasive slurry, the amount and type of abrasive particles and the amount and type of the optional additives. For thermal energy, the 30 temperature can range from about 30 to 150C, generally between 40 to 120C. The time can range from about 5 minutes to over 24 hours. The radiation energy sources include electron beam, ultraviolet light, or visible light. Electron beam radiation, which is also known as 35 ionizing radiation, can be used at an energy level of about 0.1 to about 10 Mrad, preferably at an energy Sl lBSTITl~TE StlEET (RI~LE 26) WO9S/07797 2 1 7 0 9 ~ 9 PCT~S94/00754 level of about 1 to about 10 Mrad. Ultraviolet radiation refers to non-particulate radiation having a wavelength within the range of about 200 to about 400 nanometers, preferably within the range of about 250 to 5 400 nanometers. It is preferred that 300 to 600 Watt/inch (120-240 Watt/cm) ultraviolet lights are used. Visible radiation refers to non-particulate radiation having a wavelength within the range of about 400 to about 800 nanometers, preferably in the range of 10 about 400 to about 550 nanometers. It is preferred that 300 to 600 Watt/inch (120-240 Watt/cm) visible lights are used.
One method to make the abrasive article of the invention is illustrated in Figure 3. Backing 41 15 leaves an unwind station 42 and at the same time the production tool 46 leaves an unwind station 45.
Cavities (not depicted) formed in the upper surface of production tool 46 are coated and filled with an abrasive slurry by means of coating station 44.
20 Alternatively, coating station 44 can be relocated to deposit the slurry on backing 41 instead of the production tool before reaching drum 43 and the same ensuing steps are followed as used for coating the production tooling as described below. Either way, it 25 is possible to heat the abrasive slurry (not shown) and/or subject the slurry to ultrasonics prior to coating to lower the viscosity. The coating station can be any conventional coating means such as drop die coater, knife coater, curtain coater, vacuum die coater 30 or a die coater. During coating the formation of air bubbles should be minimized. The preferred coating t~ch~;que uses a vacuum die coater, which can be of the type such as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,594,865;
4,959,265 and 5,077,870. After the production tool is 35 coated, the backing and the abrasive slurry are brought into contact by any means such that the abrasive slurry SUBST~TUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7Q~q PCT~S94/00754 wets the front surface of the backing. In Figure 3, the abrasive slurry is brought into contact with the backing by means of contact nip roll 47, and contact nip roll 47 forces the resulting construction against 5 support drum 43. Next, any convenient form of energy 48 is transmitted into the abrasive slurry that is adequate to at least partially cure the binder precursor. The term partial cure is meant that the binder precursor is polymerized to such a state that 10 the abrasive slurry does not flow from an inverted test tube. The binder precursor can be fully cured once it is removed from the production tool by any energy source. The production tool is rewound on mandrel 49 so that the production tool can be reused again.
15 Additionally, abrasive article 120 is wound on mandrel 121. If the binder precursor is not fully cured, the binder precursor can then be fully cured by either time and/or exposure to an energy source. Additional steps to make the abrasive article according to this first 20 method is further described in U.S. Patent No.
5,152,917 (Pieper et al.) or the above-mentioned U.S.
Patent Application No. 08/004,929 (Spurgeon et al.).
Other guide rolls are used where convenient and are designated rolls 40.
Relative to this first method, it is preferred that the binder precursor is cured by radiation energy.
The radiation energy can be transmitted through the production tool or backing so long as the production tool or backing does not appreciably absorb the 30 radiation energy. Additionally, the radiation energy source should not appreciably degrade the production tool. It is preferred to use a thermoplastic production tool and ultraviolet or visible light.
As mentioned above, in a variation of this first 35 method, the abrasive slurry can be coated onto the backing and not into the cavities of the production SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 ~ 7 ~ ~ & q PCT~S94/00754 tool. The abrasive slurry coated backing is then brought into contact with the production tool such that the abrasive slurry flows into the cavities of the production tool. The remaining steps to make the 5 abrasive article are the same as detailed above.
A second method for making the abrasive article is illustrated in Figure 4. The production tool 55 is provided in the outer surface of a drum, e.g., as a sleeve which is secured around the circumference of a 10 drum in separate sheet form (e.g., as a heat-shrunk nickel form) in any convenient manner. Backing 51 leaves an unwind station 52 and the abrasive slurry is coated into the cavities of the production tool 55 by means of the coating station 53. The abrasive slurry 15 can be coated onto the backing by any technique such as drop die coater, roll coater, knife coater, curtain coater, vacuum die coater, or a die coater. Again, it is possible to heat the abrasive slurry and/or subject the slurry to ultrasonics prior to coating to lower the 20 viscosity. During coating the formation of air bubbles should be minimized. Then, the backing and the production tool cont~; n; ng the abrasive slurry are brought into contact by a nip roll 56 such that the abrasive slurry wets the front surface of the backing.
25 Next, the binder precursor in the abrasive slurry is at least partially cured by exposure to an energy source 57. After this at least partial cure, the abrasive slurry is converted to an abrasive composite that is bonded or adhered to the backing. The resulting 30 abrasive article 59 is stripped and removed from the production tool at nip rolls 58 and wound onto a rewind station 60. In this method, the energy source can be thermal energy or radiation energy. If the energy source is either ultraviolet light or visible light, 35 the backing should be transparent to ultraviolet or visible light. An example of such a backing is SU~STITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO9~/07797 ~ t 7 B ~ ~ ~ PCT~S94100754 polyester backing. Other guide and contact rolls can be used where convenient and are designated rolls 50.
In another variation of this second method, the abrasive slurry can be coated directly onto the front 5 surface of the backing by moving coating station 53 to a location upstream from roll 56. The abrasive slurry coated backing is then brought into contact with the production tool such that the abrasive slurry wets into the cavities of the production tool. The remaining lO steps to make the abrasive article are the same as detailed above.
After the abrasive article is made, it can be flexed and/or humidified prior to converting. The abrasive article can be converted into any desired form 15 such as a cone, endless belt, sheet, disc, etc. before the abrasive article is put into service.
Method of Refininq ~ ~orkpioce Surface Another embodiment of this invention pertains to a method of refining a workpiece surface. This method 20 involves bringing into frictional contact the abrasive article of this invention with a workpiece. The term refine means that a portion of the workpiece is abraded away by the abrasive article. Additionally, the surface finish associated with the workpiece surface is 25 reduced after this refining process. One typical surface finish measurement is Ra; Ra is the arithmetic surface finish generally measured in microinches or micrometers. The surface finish can be measured by a profilometer, such as that available under the trade 30 designation Perthometer or Surtronic.
Workpiece The workpiece can be any type of material such as metal, metal alloy, exotic metal alloy, ceramic, glass, wood, wood like material, composites, painted surface, 35 plastic, reinforced plastic, stone, and combinations thereof. The workpiece may be flat or may have a shape SUBST~TUTE S~EET (RU~E 26) ~ W095/07797 ~-~ 2 1 7~89 PCT~S94/00754 or contour associated with it. Examples of workpieces include glass ophthalmic lenses, plastic ophthalmic lenses, glass television screens, metal automotive components, plastic components, particle board, cam 5 shafts, crank shafts, furniture, turbine blades, painted automotive components, magnetic media, and the like/
Depending upon the application, the force at the abrading interface can range from about 0.1 kg to over 10 1000 kg. Generally this range is between 1 kg to 500 kg of force at the abrading interface. Also depending upon the application, there may be a liquid present duri~g abrading. This liquid can be water and/or an organic compound. Examples of typical organic 15 compounds include lubricants, oils, emulsified organic compounds, cutting fluids, soaps, or the like. These liquids may also contain other additives such as defoamers, degreasers, corrosion inhibitors, or the like. The abrasive article may oscillate at the 20 abrading interface during use. In some instances, this oscillation may result in a finer surface on the workpiece being abraded.
An abrasive composite having an adjacent abrasive composite with a different dimension attributes to this 25 relatively fine surface finish. Since a portion of the abrasive composites have different dimensions, the abrasive composites may not perfectly align in a row from the perspective of the apices of pyramidal shapes and the like. For example, Figure 8 includes a 30 representative topographical top view (and side views) of an abrasive article 85 of the invention wherein an abras:ive composite therein is designated 80 having a face ~2 and apex 81. As seen in Figure 8, the pyramidal shapes, as a whole, align in rows, and therefore, the 35 apices of the abrasive composites are aligned irrespective of the differences in side ~; ~ncions SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RU-~ 26) W095/07797 2~i~Q~ PCT~S94/007S4 ~
between adjacent abrasive composites facing each other across common grooves. This arrangement results in scratches imparted into the workpiece by the abrasive composites which are continuously crossed over. This 5 continuous crossing of previous scratches results, in the aggregate, in the finer surface finish.
The abrasive article of the invention can be used by hand or used in combination with a machine. At least one or both of the abrasive article and the 10 workpiece is moved relative to the other. The abrasive article can be converted into a belt, tape rolls, disc, sheet, and the like. For belt applications, the two free ends of an abrasive sheet are joined together and a splice is formed. It is also within the scope of 15 this invention to use a spliceless belt. Generally the endless abrasive belt traverses over at least one idler roll and a platen or contact wheel. The hardness of the platen or contact wheel is adjusted to obtain the desired rate of cut and workpiece surface finish. The 20 abrasive belt speed ranges anywhere from about 150 to 5000 meters per minute, generally between 500 to 3000 meters per minute. Again this belt speed depends upon the desired cut rate and surface finish. The belt dimensions can range from about 5 mm to 1 meter wide 25 and from about 5 cm to 10 meters long. Abrasive tapes are continuous lengths of the abrasive article. They can range in width from about 1 mm to 1 meter, generally between 5 mm to 25 cm. The abrasive tapes are usually unwound, traverse over a support pad that 30 forces the tape against the workpiece and then rewound.
The abrasive tapes can be continuously feed through the abrading interface and can be indexed. The abrasive disc, which also includes what is known in the abrasive art as "daisies", can range from about 50 mm to 1 meter 35 in diameter. Typically abrasive discs are secured to a back-up pad by an attachment means. These abrasive SUBSTiTU~E SH~ET (RULE 26) 21 7098~
discs can rotate between 100 to 20,000 revolutions per minute, typically between 1,000 to 15,000 revolutions per minute.
The features and advantages of the present 5 invention will be further illustrated by the following non-limiting examples. All parts, percentages, ratios, etc, in the examples are by weight unless otherwise indicated.
~xperimental Proc~lu ~
The following abbreviations are used throughout:
TMPTA: trimethylol propane triacrylate;
TATHEIC: triacrylate of tris(hydroxy ethyl) isocyanurate;
PH2: 2-benzyl-2-N,N-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinophenyl)-1-butanone, commercially available from Ciba Geigy Corp. under the trade designation "Irgacure 369";
ASF: amorphous silica filler, commercially available from DeGussa under the trade designation "OX-50";
FA0: fused heat treated aluminum oxide;
WA0: white fused aluminum oxide; and SCA: silane coupling agent, 3-methacryloxy-propyltrimethoxysilane, commercially available from Union Carbide under the trade designation "A--174".
General Procedure for MA1~; nq the Abrasive Artiale An abrasive slurry was prepared that contained 20.3 parts TMPTA, 8.7 parts TATHEIC, 0.3 parts PH2, part ASF, 1 part SCA and 69 parts of grade P-320 FAO.
The slurry was mixed for 20 minutes at 1200 rpm using a high shear mixer.
The production tool was a continuous web made from a polypropylene sheet material commercially available 35 from Exxon under the trade designation "PolyPro 3445".
The production tool was embossed off of a nickel-plated SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RU-~E 26) W09~7~57 2 1 7~q8q PCT~S94/00754 master. The master tool was made by diamond cutting a pattern of varying dimension grooves and indentations according to the computer programs described in the APPENDIX, and then nickel plated. The APPENDIX includes 5 the source code f or f our computer programs, which, in general, comprises a f irst program entitled "VARI-l.BAS", which generated and determined random left and right angles for side surfaces of five sided pyramidal shapes and also the material included angles for these 10 Sh~p~s; the second program entitled "VARI-STAT.BAS"
statistically tallied the number and values of the left, right, and material included angles in x and y coordinates in the array of shapes to assure randomness; the third program entitled "TOPVIEW.BAS"
15 took the random angle file and calculated where the valleys and peaks appear for the shapes having the angles determined by the first program for a square inch (6.5 c*) and printed out a display on a computer screen or printer of the topography of the array of 20 shapes; and the fourth program "MAKETAPE.BAS" took the determined angles and generated a code to control the number and type of grooves required to be cut by the diamond turning machine to make a 22.5 inch (57 cm) wide pattern of random shapes generated by the first 25 program.
In general, the production tool, as made from the master tool made using the above-mentioned four programs, contained an array of cavities that were inverted five sided pyramids (inclusive of the mouth of 30 the cavity as a "base") that had a constant depth of about 355 micrometers but varied in ~i~^ncion between 8 and 45 degrees for adjacent cavities in terms of the angle made by side faces with the intersection of a plane exten~;ng normal to the plane of tool and the 35 material included angle or apex angle of each composite was at least 25 degrees.
SUBSTITUTE S~EET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 The abrasive article was made by a method and arrangement generally depicted in Figure 3. This process was a continuous process that operated at about 15.25 meters/minute. The backing was a J weight rayon 5 backing that contained a dried latex/phenolic presize coating to seal the backing. The abrasive slurry was knife-coated onto a production tool with a 76 micrometer knife gap (3 mil) and about a 15 cm wide coating area onto the production tool. The nip 10 pressure, such as exerted by roll 47 in Figure 3, between the production tool and the backing was about 40 pounds. The energy source was one visible-light lamp, which contained a V-bulb made by Fusion Systems, Co., which operated at 600 Watts/inch (240 Watt/cm).
15 After curing the abrasive slurry, the resulting coated abrasive was thermally cured for 12 hours at 240F
(116C) to final cure the phenolic presize of the backing .
Test Proc~ure I
The coated abrasive article was converted into 7.6 cm by 335 cm endless belt and tested on a constant load surface grinder. A pre-weighed, 4150 mild steel workpiece approximately 2.5 cm by 5 cm by 18 cm was mounted in a holder. The workpiece was positioned 25 vertically, with the 2.5 cm by 18 cm face facing an appro~imately 36 cm diameter 65 Shore A durometer serrated rubber contact wheel with one on one lands over which was entrained the coated abrasive belt. The workpiece was then reciprocated vertically through an 30 18 cm path at the rate of 20 cycles per minute, while a spring loaded plunger urged the workpiece against the belt with a load of 4.5 kg (10 lbs) as the belt was driven at about 2050 meters per minute. After thirty seconds elapsed grinding time, the workpiece holder 35 assembly was removed and re-weighed, the amount of stock removed calculated by subtracting the abraded SlJBST~TlJTE SHE~T (RULE 26) W095/07797 ~ ~ 7 Q ~ ~ ~ PCT~S94/007S4 weight from the original weight, and a new, pre-weighed workpiece and holder were mounted on the equipment.
Additionally, the surface finish (Ra) and, in some cases, the Rtm, of the workpiece was also measured and 5 these procedures will be described below. The test endpoint was when the amount of steel removed in the thirty second interval was less than one third the value of the steel removed in the first thirty seconds of grinding or until the workpiece burned, i.e., became 10 discolored.
Test Proce~ure II
The same procedure as Test Procedure I was used except that a 1018 mild steel workpiece was used.
Test Proc~u~e III
A maple dowel rod that had a diameter of approximately 3 cm was installed on a lathe. The dowel rod was rotated at about 3800 rpm. A strip of abrasive article (1 inch (2.54 cm) wide and 12 inches (30.5 cm) long) was held against the dowel rod without any 20 oscillation for approximately 15 to 20 seconds. After abrading, the dowel rod was stained with a cherry oil stain commercially available from Watco.
Ra is a common measure of roughness used in the abrasives industry. Ra is defined as the arithmetic 25 mean of the departures of the roughness profile from the mean line. Ra was measured with a profilometer probe, which was a diamond tipped stylus. In general, the lower the Ra value was, the smoother or finer the workpiece surface finish. The results were recorded in 30 micrometers. The profilometer used was a Perthen M4P.
Rtm is a common measure of roughness used in the abrasive industry. Rtm is defined as the mean of five individual roughness depths of five successive measuring lengths, where an individual roughness depth 35 is the vertical distance between the highest and lowest points in a measuring length. Rtm is measured the same SlJBST~TUTE SHEET (RU~E 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7098q PCT~S94/00754 as Ra. The results are recorded in micrometers. In general, the lower the Rtm, the smoother the finish.
~x~mpl~8 .
5 Ex~m~l~s 1, lA ~n~ comD~r~tive Ex~mpl~ A, AA
Abrasive articles representative of the invention were compared with conventional coated abrasive articles having uniformly shaped and dimensioned abrasive composites. Example 1 was made according to 10 the ~'General Procedure for Making the Abrasive Article"
describe herein. Comparative Example A was a grade P320 3M 201E Three-M-ite Resin Bond cloth JE-VF coated abrasive commercially available from 3M Company, St.
Paul, MN. These abrasive products were tested 15 according to Test Procedure I and the test results can be found in Table 1. Also, additional Example lA and Comparative Example AA were performed wherein Example 1 and Comparative Example A were repeated, except that Test Procedure II was used in lieu of Test Procedure I.
20 The results also are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1 Run Ex. 1 C.Ex. A Ex. lA C. Ex. AA
Init. Cut 12.2 15.3 13.3 11.8 (grams) Init. Ra 0.86 0.88 0.98 1.18 (~m) Init.Rtm 9.43 10.66 (~m) Total Cut 283.6 156.8 255.5 247.2 (grams) Final Ra(~m) 0.33 0.43 0.37 0.40 Final Rtm 3.11 3.92 (~m) .
SllBSTlTUTE SHE~T (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 ~ ~ 7 Q 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 The above results show that the abrasive articles of the present invention, as represented by Examples 1 and lA, demonstrated higher cut and provided finer finish than the comparison examples using exclusively 5 identically shaped abrasive composites.
Ex~mple 2 an~ Comparative Example8 B through E
This set of examples compared the abrasive article of the invention with abrasive articles that had only one commonly shaped and dimensioned type of abrasive 10 composite present on the backing. All of these examples were made according to "General Procedure for Making the Abrasive Article," described above, except for the following changes. The abrasive slurry consisted of 20.3 parts TMPTA, 8.7 parts TAT~TC, 1 15 part PH2, 1 part ASF, 1 part SCA, and 69 parts of 40 micrometer WAO. Also, the production tool for Comparative Examples B through E was an embossed polypropylene thermoplastic continuous web that contained five sided pyramidal type cavities (inclusive 20 of the mouth of the cavity as a "base"). The cavities for Comparative Examples B through E were all identical in dimensions and the cavities butted up against one another. The height of the cavities for Comparative Example B was about 178 micrometers, for Comparative 25 Example C was about 63.5 micrometers, for Comparative Example D was about 711 micrometers and Comparative Example E was about 356 micrometers.
Example 2 and Comparative Examples B through E
then were tested according to Test Procedure III above.
The stained maple dowel rod abraded with Comparative Examples B through E showed evidence of grooves visible by the naked eye. In contrast, the stained maple dowel rod abraded with Example 2 representing the present invention showed no evidence of grooves visible by the SUBSTITUTE SHEET (Rl~LE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 Q 9 8 9 PCTtUS94tO0754 naked eye and produced a very fine finish on the wood workpiece.
Various modifications and alterations of this invention will become apparent to those skilled in the 5 art without departing from the scope and spirit of this invention, and it should be understood that this invention is not to be unduly limited to the illustrative embodiments set forth herein.
SllBSTlTUTE SH~ET (Rl)LE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 ~ 9 PCT~S94/00754 ~
Appendix ~*****************************
'**Program : VARI-l.BAS *
*****************************
' VARI-l.BAS - Creates random left and right half angles /
DECLARE SUB showangles () DIM SHARED LEFTANG(3000) AS INTEGER
10 DIM SHARED RIGHTANG(3000) AS INTEGER
'******* Begin Main Program *****
PI = 3.141592654#
RANDOMIZE TIMER
CLS
15 INPUT "WHAT IS THE TOOL ANGLE ", ToolAng INPUT "WHAT IS THE MINIMUM HALF ANGLE ", MinHalfAng INPUT "WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM HALF ANGLE ", MaxHalfAng INPUT "WHAT IS THE MINIMUM INCLUDED ANGLE OF THE
MATERIAL ", M; nTnclAng 20 ANG1 = 45 'ANGl is the previous grooves Right half angle 'ANGl & 2 are used to check the MinInclAng FOR I = 1 TO 2500 STEP 2 '** Calculate Odd Numbered Groove Angles ****
FOR T = 1 TO INT(RND * 100 + 1): NEXT T
'This is a random delay IF MinInclAng - ANG1 > M; n~ 1 fAng THEN
min = MinInclAng - ANG1 ELSE
min = MinHalfAng END IF
LEFTANG(I) = INT(RND * (MaxHalfAng - min + 1)+
min) IF ToolAng - LEFTANG(I) > MinHalfAng THEN
min = ToolAng - LEFTANG(I) ELSE
~UBS~iTUT~ 5HEET (R~LE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 min = M; n~ 1 fAng END IF
RIGHTANG(I) = INT(RND * (MaxHalfAng - (min) + 1) +
(min)) ANG2 = RIGHTANG(I) '** End Calculate Odd Number Groove angles **
'** Begin Calculating Even Numbered Groove angles **
FOR T = 1 TO INT(RND * lOO + 1): NEXT T
'This is a random delay RIGHTANG(I + 1) = INT(RND * (MaxHalfAng - MinHalfAng +
1) + MinHalfAng) IF ToolAng - RIGHTANG(I + 1) > MinHalfAng THEN
min = ToolAng - RIGHTANG(I + 1) min = MinHalfAng END I]F
IF MinInclAng - ANG2 > min THEN
min = MinInclAng - ANG2 min = min END IF
LEFTANG(I + 1) = INT(RND * (MaxHalfAng - (min) 1) +
(min)J
25 ANG1 - RIGHTANG(I + 1) '** End Calculating Even Numbered Groove Angles **
NEXT I
CALL ~howangles 30 OPEN 'IRANANG.TXT'' FOR OUTPUT AS #3 PRINT #3, "RANDOM ANGLE GENERATOR"
PRINT #3, "LEFT ANG RIGHT ANG"
FOR I = 1 TO 2SOO
PRINT #3, LEFTANG(I); RIGHTANG(I) SUB~TlTlJTE SHEET (RULE 26) -W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 '****************** End Main Program*************
5 SUB showangles 'This subroutine shows the first 30 grooves CLS
PI 3.141592654#
FOR I = 1 TO 30 'LOCATE 1, 1: PRINT LEFTANG(I), RIGHTANG(I), 15 LEFTANG(I) + RIGHTANG(I) A = (TAN(LEFTANG(I) * PI / 180) * 200) LINE (200, 100)-(200 - A, 300), 3 B = (TAN(RIGHTANG(I) * PI / 180) * 200) LINE (200, 100)-(200 + B, 300), 3 FOR T = 1 TO 200000: NEXT T
LINE (200, 100)-(200 - A, 300), 0 LINE (200, 100)-(200 + B, 300), 0 NEXT I
END SUB
,*****************************
'** Program : VARISTAT.BAS *
30 *****************************
DECLARE SUB SETGRAPH2 () 'Graph for Included Angles DECLARE SUB ANGLEGEN () 'Main Subroutine DECLARE SUB XGEN () 'Subroutine for Tests 35 only DECLARE SUB SETGRAPH () 'Graph for Half Angles SUBSTiTlJT~ SI~EET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 DIM 5HARED ANGLEFT(2501) AS INTEGER 'Array for left half angles Direction l DIM SHARED ANGRIGHT(2501) AS INTEGER 'Array for right half angles Direction l 5 DIM SHARED ANGLEFT2(2501) AS INTEGER 'Array for left half angles Direction 2 DIM SHARED ANGRIGHT2(2501) AS INTEGER 'Array for right half angles Direction 2 DIM S~ARED HALF(8 TO 45) AS l~ ~ 'Array to tally 10 number of angles between 8 and 45 Direction l DIM SHARED HALF2(8 TO 45) AS I~ K 'Array to tally number of angles between 8 and 45 Direction 2 DIM SIIARED ACCUM(O TO 100) AS INTEGER 'Array to tally number of included angles between 40 and 90 Dir 15 DIM SHARED ACCUM2(0 TO 100) AS INTEGER 'Array to tally number of included angles between 40 and 90 Dir CLS
CALL ANGLEGEN
'CALL XGEN 'This was for test purposes only SUB ANGLEGEN
CALL SETGRAPH
OPEN '~RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #3 'Two different .TXT files would have been created, 25 however here we use the same file OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #4 INPUT #3, A$
INPUT #3, B$
INPUT #4, A$
30 INPUT #4, B$
FOR I = l TO 2500 INPUT #3, ANGLEFT(I) INPUT #3, ANGRIGHT(I) INPUT #4, ANGLEFT2(I) INPUT #4, ANGRIGHT2(I) NEXT
E SH~E~ (R~LE 26) WO 95/07797 2 i 7 ~ 9 ~ 9 PCT/US94/00754 CLOSE 3, 4 FOR I = 1 TO 2500 HALF(ANGLEFT(I)) = HALF(ANGLEFT(I)) + 1 HALF2(ANGRIGHT(I)) = HALF2(ANGRIGHT(I)) +
NEXT I
LOCATE 2, 10: COLOR 11 PRINT "First Direction Total Left Half Angle"
10 LOCATE 3, 10: COLOR 12 PRINT "First Direction Total Right Half Angle"
FOR I = 8 TO 45 LINE (I, O)--(I, HALF(I)), 11 15 LINE (I + .5, 0)--(I + .5, HALF2(I)), 12 HALF(I) = 0 HALF2(I) = 0 NEXT I
SLEEP
CALL SETGRAPH
LOCATE 2, 10: COLOR 11 PRINT "Second Direction Total Left Half Angle"
LOCATE 3, 10: COLOR 12 25 PRINT "Second Direction Total Right Half Angle"
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 HALF(ANGLEFT2(I)) = HALF(ANGLEFT2(I)) +
HALF2(ANGRIGHT2(I)) = HALF2(ANGRIGHT2(I)) + 1 FOR I = 8 TO 45 LINE (I, O)-(I, HALF(I)), 11 HALF(I) = 0 35 LINE (I + .5, 0)-(I + .5, HALF2(I)), 12 HALF2(I) = 0 ~UB~TlTll~C SHEET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 ~ 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 NEXT I
SLEEP
5 LOCATE 2, 10: COLOR 11 PRINT "First Direction Total Included Angles (Left +
Right Half Angle)"
LOCATE 3, 10: COLOR 12 PRINT "Second Direction Total Included Angles (Left +
10 Right Half Angle)"
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 ACCUM(ANGLEFT(I) + ANGRIGHT(I)) = ACCUM(ANGLEFT(I) +
ANGRIGHT(I)) + 1 ACCUM2(ANGLEFT2(I) + ANGRIGHT2(I)) =
ACCUM2(ANGLEFT2(I) + ANGRIGHT2(I)) + 1 NEXT I
FOR I = 40 TO 90 LINE (I, 0)-(I, ACCUM(I)), 11 ACCUM(I) = 0 LINE (I + .5, 0)-(I + .5, ACCUM2(I)), 12 ACCUM2(I) = 0 NEXT I
SLEEP
SUB SETGRAPH
30 WINDOW (4, -30)-(50, 200) CLS
LINE (6, 0)-(6, 200), 3 LINE (6, 0)-(50, 0), 3 35 LINE (6, 195)-(50, 195), 3 LINE (6, 105)-(50, 105), 3 SU~STlTllTE S~EET (RlJLE 26~
WO 95/07797 2 1 7 D 9 8 ~ PCT/US94/00754 ~
LINE (6, 50)--(50, 50), 3 LINE (6, 150)-(50, 150), 3 LOCATE 23, 7: PRINT "8"
LOCATE 23, 72: PRINT "45"
5 LOCATE 23, 40: PRINT "27"
LOCATE 22, 3: PRINT "1"
LOCATE 1, 1: PRINT "200"
LOCATE 11, 1: PRINT "100", END SUB
WINDOW (37, -30)-(95, 200) CLS
LINE (39, 0)-(39, 200), 3 LINE (39, 0)--(95, 0), 3 LINE (39, 198)--(95, 198), 3 LINE (39, 102)--(95, 102), 3 20 LINE (39, 50)--(95, 50), 3 LINE (39, 150)--(95, 150), 3 LOCATE 23, 4: PRINT "40"
LOCATE 23, 73: PRINT "90"
LOCATE 23, 39: PRINT "65"
25 LOCATE 22, 3: PRINT "1"
LOCATE 1, 1: PRINT "200"
LOCATE 11, 1: PRINT "100"
END SUB
30 SUB XGEN 'This subroutine was for test purposes only CALL SETGRAPH
OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #3 INPUT #3, A$
35 INPUT #3, B$
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 ~U~STI~IJTE ~HEET ~RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 ~ ~ 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 INPUT #3, ANGLEFT(I) INPUT #3, ANGRIGHT(I) NEXT I
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 HALF(ANGLEFT(I)) = HALF(ANGLEFT(I)) + 1 NEXT I
FOR I = 8 TO 45 LINE (I, 0) (I, HALF(I)), 11 HALF(I) = 0 NEXT I
SLEEP
CALL SETGRAPH
15 FOR I = 1 TO 2500 HALF(ANGRIGHT(I)) = HALF(ANGRIGHT(I)) + 1 NEXT I
FOR I = 8 TO 45 LINE (I, 0)-(I, HALF(I)), 11 HALF(I) = 0 NEXT I
SLEEP
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 ACCUM(ANGLEFT(I) + ANGRIGHT(I)) = ACCUM(ANGLEFT(I) +
ANGRIGHT(I)) + 1 NEXT I
FOR I = 40 TO 90 LINE (I, 0)-(I, ACCUM(I)), 11 ACCUM(I) = O
NEXT X
SLEEP
END SIJB
SllBSTlTUTE SHEFr (R~LE 26) WO95/07797 2 1 7 Q 9 ~ ~ PCT~S94/007S4 ~
*****************************
'** Program : TOPVIEW.BAS *
*****************************
'* In general it takes the random angle data file, 5 calculates where the valleys and peaks are, draws black straight lines for the valleys, then connects the peaks across the diagonal. Then it displays the output on the screen or an HP 7475 plotter. *
******************************
10 DECLARE SUB PLOTPEAKS () DECLARE SUB PLOTDOTS () DECLARE SUB LINES () DECLARE SUB DIAGONAL () DIM SHARED ML(2500) AS INTEGER
15 DIM SHARED MR(2500) AS Ih~l~
DIM SHARED NL(2500) AS INTEGER
DIM SHARED NR(2500) AS lN'l'~
DIM SHARED M(5000) AS DOUBLE
20 DIM SHARED N(5000) AS DOUBLE
COMMON SHARED PI, X, GROOVES
PI = 3.141592654#
GROOVES = 1000 25 OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #2 OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #3 INPUT "ENTER IN THE SQUARE SIZE YOU WOULD LIKE (.2 ->
1.5 INCHES) ", X
30 INPUT #2, A$
INPUT #2, B$
FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES
INPUT #2, ML(I) INPUT #2, MR(I) . .
~l~BST~TE ~HE~T (P~ E 26) ~ W095/07797 ~ t 7~ PCT~S~J~754 INPUT #3, A$
INPUT #3, B$
FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES
INPUT #3, NL(I) INPUT #3, NR(I) NEXT I
FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES
M(I * 2 - 1) = M((I - 1) * 2) + TAN(ML(I) * PI / 180) * . 01~
M(I * 2) = M(I * 2 - 1) + TAN(MR(I) * PI / 180) *
.014 N(I * 2 - 1) = N((I - 1) * 2) + TAN(NL(I) * PI / 180) 15 * .014 N(I * 2) = N(I * 2 - 1) + TAN(NR(I) * PI / 180) *
.014 NEXT I
20 LOCATE 15, 15 INPUT "Would you like to see the data on the (S)creen or (P)lotter", ans$
ans$ = UCASE$(ans$) 25 IF ans$ = "S" THEN
SCREEN g WINDOW SCREEN (-(X / 10), -(X / 10))-(X, (X + X /
10) * (.75 - .75 * .138)) PAINT (X / 2, X / 2), 15 CALL LINES
SLEEP
CLS
PAINT (X / 2, X / 2), 15 CALL DIAGONAL
SUBSTlT(3T~ SH~ U~ 26~
W095107797 2 ~ 7Q~8~ PCT~S94/007S4 ~
END IF
IF ans$ = "P" THEN
CALL PLOTDOTS
CALL PLOTPEAKS
SLEEP
END IF
SUB DIAGONAL
10 FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES * 2 STEP 2 'LINE (M(I), N(l))-(M(I), 10) 'LINE (M(l), N(I))-(10, N(I)) NEXT I
15 FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 LINE (M(I), -.014)-(M(I + 1), O) LINE (M(I + 1), 0)-(M(I + 2), -.014) NEXT I
20 LINE (M(l), -.014)-(M(l), -.02) LINE -(M(GROOVES * 2 - 2), -.02) LINE -(M(GROOVES * 2 - 2), -.014) FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 LINE (-.014, N(I))-(0, N(I + 1)) 25 LINE (0, N(I + 1))-(-.014, N(I + 2)) NEXT I
LINE (--014, N(1))-(-.02, N(l)) LINE -(-.02, N(GROOVES * 2 - 2)) LINE -(-.014, N(GROOVES * 2 - 2)) FOR NN = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 FOR MM = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 1), N(NN ~ 1)), 2, 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 1), N(NN - 1)), 4 ~LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM - 1), N(NN + 1))~ 4 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM - 1), N(NN - 1)), 2 SlJ~STITlJT~ SHEET (R~LE 26) ~ WO95/07797 2 ~ 7 0 ~ ~ 9 PCT~S94100754 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 2), N(NN + 2)), 2 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 2), N(NN - 2)), 4 PSET (M(MM), N(NN)), 4 IF M(MM - 1) > X THEN GOTO STOPMM
IF N(NN - 1) > (X + X / 10) * (.75 - .75 * .138) THEN GOTO STOPNN
NEXT MM
STOPMM:
NEXT NN
'PAINT (M(5) + (M(6) - M(5)) / 2, N(6) - (N(6) - N(5)) / 2), 11 'CIRCLE (M(5) + (M(6) - M(5)) / 2, N(6) - (N(6) - N(5)) / 2), .001, 11 STOPNN:
END SUB
SUB LINES
FOR I = 1 TO 200 STEP 2 LINE (M(I), N(l))-(M(I), 10) LINE (M(l), N(I))-(10, N(I)) NEXT I
FOR I = 1 TO 198 STEP 2 LINE (M(I), -.014)-(M(I + 1), 0) LINE (M(I + 1), 0)-(M(I + 2), -.014) NEXT I
LINE (M(l), -.014)-(M(l), -.02) LINE -(M(198), -.02) 30 LINE -(M(198), -.014) FOR I = 1 TO 198 STEP 2 LINE (-.014, N(I))-(O, N(I + 1)) LINE (0, N(I + 1))-(-.014, N(I + 2)) NEXT I
35 LINE (-.014, N(l))-(-.02, N(l)) LINE -(-.02, N(198)) SUBST~TUTE SH~ (RULE 26) WO 95/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 ~ PCT/US94/007S4 ~
LINE --(--.014, N(198)) FOR NN = 2 TO 198 STEP 2 FOR MM = 2 TO 198 STEP 2 5 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))--(M(MM + 1), N(NN + 1)), 2 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))--(M(MM+ 1), N(NN -- 1)), 4 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))--(M(MM -- 1), N(NN + 1)), 4 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))--(M(MM -- 1), N(NN -- 1)), 2 IF M(MM -- 1) > X THEN GOTO 300 IF N(NN -- 1) > (X + X / 10) * (.75 -- .75 * .138) NEXT MM
NEXT NN
15 'PAINT (M(5) + (M(6) -- M(5)) / 2, N(6) -- (N(6) -- N(5)) / 2), 11 'CIRCLE (M(5) + (M(6) - M(5)) / 2, N(6) - (N(6) - N(5)) 2), .001, 11 END SUB
SUB PLOTDOTS
'WINDOW SCREEN (-(X / 10), -(X / 10))-(X, (X + X / 10) 25 * (.75 - .75 * .138)) OPEN I'COMl:9600,S,7,1,RS,CS65535,DS,CD'' FOR RANDOM AS
#4 'PRINT #4, USING "IP;
30 SC##. #,##. #,##. #,##. #;"; (-(X / 10));
(X); (- (X / 10) ); ( (X + X / 10 'PRINT #4, USING "IP250,596,7470,7796;
SC##. #,##. #,##. #,##. #;"; 0; 4; 0; 3 PRINT #4, 'lIN;IP250,596,7443,7796; SC0,1,0,1;"
35 PRINT #4, "VS30;"
PRINT #4, "SPl;"
SllBSTITlJTE SHE~T (RULE 26~
~ WO 95/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 ~ PCT~S94/007S4 FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES * 2 STEP 2 'LINE (M(I), N(l))-(M(I)~ 10) 'LINE (M(l), N(I))-(10, N(I)) NEXT I
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #, -.014;"; M(l) PRINT #4, "PD;"
FOR I = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 'LINE (M(I), -.014)-(M(I + 1), 0) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #, 0"; M(I) 'LINE (M(I + 1), O)-(M(I + 2), -.014) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,-.014"; M(I + 1) P = I + 1 IF M(I + 1) > X THEN GOTO 600 NEXT I
'LINE (M(l), -.014)-(M(l), -.02) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #, -.03;"; M(P) 'LINE -(M(P), -.02) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #, -.03;"; M(l) 'LINE -(M(P), -.014) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,-.014;PU;"; M(l) PRINT #4, USING "PA -.014,##. #;PD;"; N(l) 25 FOR I = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 'LINE (-.014, N(I))-(0, N(I + 1)) PRINT #4, USING "PA 0,##. #;"; N(I) 'LINE (0, N(I + 1))-(-.014, N(I + 2)) PRINT #4, USING "PA -.014,##. #;"; N(I + 1) Q = I+ 1 IF N(I + 1) > X THEN GOTO 700 NEXT I
'LINE (-.014, N(l))-(-.02, N(l)) 35 PRINT #4, USING "PA -.03,##. #;"; N(Q) 'LINE -(-.02, N(Q)) SU~STITUT~ SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 ~ 9 8 ~ PCT~S94/00754 ~
PRINT #4, USING "PA -.03,##. #;"; N(l) 'LINE -(-.014, N(Q)) PRINT #4, USING "PA -.014,##. #;PU;"; N(l) PRINT #4, "SP4;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;PD;"; M(2); N(2) A = 2 FOR B = 2 TO P STEP 2 FOR COUNT = O TO Q - 1 STEP 2 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 2), N(NN + 2)), 2 PRINT #4, USING "PD;PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B +
COUNT) N (A + COUNT) IF M(B + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 400 IF N(A + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 400 NEXT COUNT
PRINT #4, "PU;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M (B + 2); N
(A) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;PD;"; M(2); N(4) B = 2 FOR A = 4 TO Q STEP 2 FOR COUNT = O TO P - 1 STEP 2 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 2), N(NN + 2)), 2 PRINT #4, USING "PD;PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B +
COUNT); N(A + COUNT) IF M(B + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 401 IF N(A + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 401 NEXT COUNT
PRINT #4, "PU;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B); N(A + 2) ~STIT~T~ SHEET (RULE 26) ~ WO 9~/077g7 2 ~ 7 0 9 8 9 PCTIUS94/00754 'PRINT #4, "PA.25,.25;PD;PA.75,.25;PA.75,.75;PA.25,.75;PA.25,.25;"
BEEP
END SUB
SUB PLOTPEAKS
OPEN "COMl:9600,S,7,1,RS,CS65535,DS,CD" FOR RANDOM AS
10 #4 PRINT #4, "IN;IP250,596,7443,7796; SCO,1,0,1;"
PRINT #4, "VS50;"
15 PRINT #4, "SPl;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #, --.014;"; M(l) PRINT #4, "PD;"
20 FOR I = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #, O"; M(I) PRINT #4, USING I'PA ##. #,--.014"; M(I + 1) P = I + 1 IF M(I + 1) > X THEN GOTO 1600 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #, -.03;"; M(P) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #, -.03;"; M(l) 30 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,--.014;PU;"; M(l) PRINT #4, USING "PA -.014,##. #;PD;"; N(l) FOR I = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 PRINT #4, USING "PA O,##. #;"; N(I) PRINT #4, USING 'IPA --.014,##. #;"; N(I + 1) Q = I + 1 ~iJB~TITUTE SI~EET (RULE 2~) W095/07797 2 ~ 7~989 PCT~S94/00754 ~
IF N(I + 1) > X THEN GOTO 1700 NEXT I
5 PRINT #4, USING "PA -.03,##. #;"; N(Q) PRINT #4, USING "PA -.03,##. #;"; N(l) PRINT #4, USING "PA -.014,##. #;PU;"; N(l) FOR I = 1 TO P STEP 4 PRINT #4, USING "PA
##. #,##. #;PD;PA##. #,##. #;PU;"; M(I);
N(l); M(I); N(Q) PRINT #4, USING "PA
##. #,##. #;PD;PA##. #,##. #;PU;"; M(I +
15 2); N(Q); M(I + 2); N(l) NEXT I
FOR I = 1 TO Q STEP 4 PRINT #4, USING "PA
20 ##. #,##. #;PD;PA##. #,##. #;PU;"; M(l);
N(I); M(P); N(I) PRINT #4, USING "PA
##. #,##. #;PD;PA##. #,##. #;PU;"; M(P);
N(I + 2); M(l); N(I + 2) PRINT #4, "SP4;VS20;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(l); N(l) 30 A = 1 FOR B = 1 TO P STEP 2 FOR COUNT = 0 TO Q - 1 STEP 1 PRINT #4, USING "PD;PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B +
COUNT); N(A + COUNT) IF M(B + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 1400 IF N(A + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 1400 SUBST5~lJT~ SHE~T (R~ 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94100754 NEXT COUNT
PRINT #4, "PU;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B + 2); N(A) PRINT #4, "SP3;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(P); N(l) A = 1 10 FOR B = P TO 1 STEP -2 FOR COUNT = 0 TO Q - 1 STEP 1 PRINT #4, USING "PD;PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B -COUNT); N(A + COUNT) IF B - COUNT 1 = 0 THEN GOTO 2500 IF A + COUNT = Q THEN GOTO 2500 NEXT COUNT
PRINT #4, "PU;"
IF B - 2 <= 0 THEN GOTO 2000 20 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B - 2); N(A) NEXT B
PRINT #4, "SP4;"
25 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(l); N(3) B = 1 FOR ~ = 3 TO Q STEP 2 FOR COUNT = 0 TO P - 1 STEP 1 PRINT #4, USING "PD;PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B +
30 COUNT); N(A + COUNT) IF M(B + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 1401 IF N(A + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 1401 NEXT COUNT
35 PRINT #4, "PU;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B); N(A + 2) SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RU~E 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 NEXT A
PRINT #4, "SP3;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(P); N(3) 5 B = P
FOR A = 3 TO Q STEP 2 FOR COUNT = O TO Q - 1 STEP 1 PRINT #4, USING l'PD;PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B -COUNT); N(A + COUNT) IF B - COUNT - 1 = O THEN GOTO 2400 IF A + COUNT = Q THEN GOTO 2400 NEXT COUNT
PRINT #4, "PU;"
15 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##. #,##. #;"; M(B); N(A + 2) NEXT A
BEEP
,*****************************
'** Program : MAKETAPE.BAS *
,*****************************
'MAKETAPE.BAS
' 1) Ask for the real tool angle 30 ' 2) Read in all Left and Right angles 3) Figure out how many grooves it will take to make a 22.5 inch wide pattern ' 4) Write the Code ' SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) ~ W095/077~7 2 1 7 0 9 ~ ~ PCT~S94100754 DECLARE SUB STOPFANUK () ' Code to shut down DTM
DECLARE SUB STARTFANUK () ' Code to start up DTM
DECLARE SUB XthenLEFT (A!) ' Code generation for: X
move then Left angle plunge 5 DECL~RE SUB ROTATEthenRIGHT (A!) ' Code generation for:
Rotate C then Right angle plunge DECL~RE SUB XthenRIGHT (A!) ' Code generation for: X
move then Right angle plunge DECLARE SUB ROTATEthenLEFT (A!) ' Code generation for:
10 Rotate C then Left angle plunge '* LEFT() - array to store the left angle information '* RIGHT() - array to store the right angle information '* xr~ovE() - array to store the X distance between 15 grooves DIM SHARED LEFT(2500) AS INTEGER, RIGHT(2500) AS
DIM SHARED XMOVE(2500) AS DOUBLE
20 COMMON SHARED TOOLANG AS DOUBLE, CABS AS DOUBLE, XPOS
AS DOUBLE
'******** BEGIN MAIN PROGRAM *********
PI = 3.141592654#
CLS
LOCATE 5, 5 INPUT "WHAT IS THE REAL TOOL ANGLE ", TOOLANG
INPUT "WHAT IS THE PEAK HEIGHT ", Height OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #3 'Opens data file of angles INPUT #3, A$
INPUT #3, B$
SUBST~TUT~ S~ET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S9~ 7~4 ~
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 'Reads all Left and Right angles from data file INPUT #3, LEFT(I) INPUT #3, RIGHT(I) XMOVE(l) = TAN(LEFT(l) * PI / 180) * Height ' This 10 formula calculates the horizontal movement for the first groove XPOS = XP0S + XMOVE(l) FOR I = 2 TO 2500 XMOVE(I) = TAN(RIGHT(I - 1) * PI / 180) *
Height + TAN(LEFT(I) * PI / 180) * Height ' This formula calculates the horizontal movement XPOS = XPOS + XMOVE(I) P = I
' P is the number of grooves IF XPOS > 22.5 THEN GOTO 100 ' Checks to make sure our pattern width is < 22.5 NEXT I
LOCATE 10, 10: PRINT USING "GROOVES = : PATTERN WIDTH = ##. "; P; XPOS
XPOS = O
30 OPEN "FANUK.TXT" FOR OUTPUT AS #3 PRINT "WRITING TO FILE"
CALL STARTFANUK '* This Block of code Generates the CNC file to run the FANUK controller 35 FOR I = 1 TO P STEP 2 '*
CALL XthenLEFT(I) '*
SUBS~TUTE SHEE~ (RU~E 26) W095/07797 ~ 7 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 CALL ROTATEthenRIGHT(I) ~*
CA:LL XthenRIGHT(I + 1) '*
CA:LL ROTATEthenLEFT(I + 1) '*
NEXT I '*
5 CALL STOPFANUK '*
PRINT "DONE"
'********** END MAIN PROGRAM ***************
'***~*The information below describes the two subroutines of the CNC code ******
'THE SUBROUTINES 0171 & 0172 ARE AS FOLLOWS
'0171;
'G91 G01 Y 0.00200 F 1.0;
'G91 G01 Y 0.01587 F 0.03;
'G91 G01 Y 0.00013 F 0.005;
'G04P245;
'G91 G01 -0.013 F l.O;
'M99;
' ;
'0172;
'G91 G01 Y 0.01287 F 0.03;
'G91 G01 Y 0.00013 F 0.005;
'G04P245;
'G91 G01 Y -0.018 F l.O;
'M99;
' ;
SUB ROTATEthenLEFT (A) 35 CABS = -1 * (LEFT(A) + 90) + TOOLANG
PRINT #3, USING "GOl G90 C ##. ## F 300.0;"; CABS
~JBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26~
W095/07797 2 1 7 0 q 8 9 PCTtUS94/00754 ~
PRINT #3, "M98 P172 Ll;"
END SUB
5 SUB ROTATEthenRIGHT,(A) CABS = -1 * (90 - RIGHT(A)) PRINT #3, USING "GOl G90 C ##. ## F 300.0;"; CABS
PRINT #3, "M98 P172 Ll;"
END SUB
SUB STARTFANUK
15 PRINT #3, ";"
PRINT #3, "G94 G20 G61;"
END SUB
PRINT #3, "M54;"
PRINT #3, "M50;"
PRINT #3, "M58;"
25 PRINT #3, "M59;"
PRINT #3, "M51;"
PRINT #3, "M02;"
PRINT #3, IlMOO;~
PRINT #3, '';
END SUB
SUB XthenLEFT (A) 35 PRINT #3, USING "GOO G91 X ##. ## F l.O;"; XMOVE(A) XPOS = XPOS + XMOVE(A) SUB~TITUTE S~EI~T (RU~E 2~
~ 1 7 n n n ~ PCT~S94/00754 WO 95/07797 ~ I / U ~ ~ 7 .
CABS = -1 * (LEFT(A) + 90) + TOOLANG
PRINT #3, USING "GOl G90 C . ## F 300.0;"; CABS
PRINT #3, "M98 P171 Ll;"
SUB XthenRIGHT (A) PRINT #3, USING "GOO G91 X ##. ## F 1.0;"; XMOVE(A) XPOS = XPOS + XMOVE(A) 10 CABS = -1 * (90 - RIGHT(A)) PRINT #3, USING "G01 G90 C . ## F 300.0;"; CABS
PRINT #3, "M98 P171 Ll;"
END SUB
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (Rl~LE 26) -
Preferably, in this aspect of the invention, the right and left half angles of the projections formed in the master surface each have a value between 8O and 45O
15 and the three-dimensional shapes comprise pyramids.
Other features, advantages, and constructs of the invention will be better understood from the following description of figures and the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
BRIBF DE8CRIP~ION OF THE DRAWING8 Fig. 1 is an end sectional view representing one embodiment of an abrasive article of this invention.
Fig. 2 is an end sectional view representing another embodiment of an abrasive article of this 2 5 invention.
Fig. 3 is a side schematic view showing an apparatus for making an abrasive article according to this invention.
Fig. 4 is a side schematic view showing an 30 alternate apparatus for making an abrasive article according to this invention.
Fig. 5 is a ScAnn;ng Electron Microscope (SEM) photomicrograph taken at 45X of the top surface of an abrasive article of the invention having 355 micrometer 35 high pyramidal-shaped abrasive composites of varying ~;me~ion.
SlJBSTl~UTE SHEEr (Rl~L~ 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 7~989 PCT~S94/007S4 ~
Fig. 6 is a SEM photomicrograph taken at 25X of the top surface of a polypropylene production tool of the present invention having about 355 micrometer deep pyramidal-shaped cavities of varying dimensions.
Fig. 7 is a plane view in schematic of a production tool of the invention.
Fig. 8 is a schematic plane view of the topography of an abrasive article of the present invention having pyramidal shapes for all the abrasive composites, 10 wherein adjacent shapes have the same height but different side angles.
DETAILED DE~CRIPTION
The abrasive article of the invention exhibits a high rate of cut while imparting a relatively level, 15 fine surface finish on the workpiece being abraded and does not readily scribe the workpiece. While not desiring to be bound to any theory at this time, it is hypothesized that an array of abrasive composites having perfect pitch, i.e., an array of abrasive 20 composites that are all identical in dimensions, may generate a vibrational resonance, whereby the working abrasive article surface may reach a resonant vibration state which can cause surface finish problems, known as chatter marks. In the present invention, it is believed 25 that the variation in the dimensions between adjacent precisely-shaped abrasive composites disrupts and/or prevents such vibrational resonance from developing to thus provide a high cut-rate, fine finish with decreased chatter incidence in addition to decreased 30 scribing.
For purposes of this invention, the expression "precisely-shaped", or the like, as used herein in describing the abrasive composites, refers to abrasive composites having a shape that has been formed by 35 curing the curable binder of a flowable mixture of abrasive particles and curable binder while the mixture SIJBSTITIJT~ SHE~T (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 ¦ 7 0! ~ $ q PCT~S94/00754 is both being borne on a backing and filling a cavity on the surface of a production tool. Such a "precisly shaped" abrasive composite would thus have precisely the same shape as that of the cavity. Further, the 5 precise shape of the abrasive composite is defined by relatively smooth-surfaced sides that are bounded and joined by well-defined sharp edges having distinct edge lengths with distinct endpoints defined by the intersections of the various sides with the proviso 10 that at least one of said abrasive composites has at least one dimension which is different from that of an adjacent abrasive composite or composites.
For purposes of this invention, the term "boundary", as used herein to define the abrasive 15 composites, means the exposed surfaces and edges of each abrasive composite that delimit and define the actual three-dimensional shape of each abrasive composite. These distinct and discernible boundaries are readily visible and clear when a cross-section of 20 the abrasive article of the invention is examined under a microscope such as a scanning electron microscope.
The distinct and discernible boundaries of each abrasive composite form the cross-sectional outlines and contours of the precise shapes of the present 25 invention. These boundaries separate and distinguish one abrasive composite from another even when the abrasive composites abutt each other along a common border at their bases. By comparison, in an abrasive composite that does not have a precise shape, the 30 boundaries and edges are not definitive, e.g., where the abrasive composite sags before completion of its curing.
- For purposes of this invention, the term "dimension", as used in connection with defining the 35 abrasive composites, means a measure of spatial extent such as an edge length of a side surface (inclusive of SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 7~989 PCT~S94/007S4 the base) of the shape associated with an abrasive composite or, alternatively, the "dimension" can mean a measure of an angle of inclination of a side surface ex~en~;ng from the backing. Therefore, for purposes of 5 this invention, a "dimension" that is "different" for two different abrasive composites, means an edge length or an angle of intersection made at the meeting edge of two planar surfaces of a shape of a first abrasive composite that is nowhere duplicated in value by any of 10 the edge lengths or angles of intersections defining the shape of a second abrasive composite in the array.
These first and second abrasive composites can be adjacent in a preferred embodiment.
For purposes of this invention, the terminology 15 "geometrical shape" means a basic category of three-dimensional regular geometrical shape, such as cubic, pyramidal, pyrismatic, conical, cylindrical, truncated pyramidal, truncated conical and the like.
For purposes of this invention, the terminology 20 "adjacent composite" or "adjacent composites", or the like, as used herein, means at least two neighboring composites which lack any intervening abrasive composite structure located on a direct line therebetween.
Referring to Figure 1 for illustrative purposes, the side view of the abrasive article 10 shows a backing 11 having a pair of opposite side edges 19 (one shown), a machine direction axis (not shown) would extend parallel to the direction of said side edges 19 30 for purposes of this illustration, and a plurality of abrasive composites 12 fixed to at least the top surface 16 of the backing. The abrasive composites 12 comprise a plurality of abrasive particles 13 dispersed in the binder 14. Each abrasive composite has a 35 discernible precise shape. It is preferred that the abrasive particles do not protrude beyond the planar SUBSTiTUTE Sl~EET (RIJLE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 surface planes 15 of the shape before the coated abrasive article is put into service. As the coated abrasive article is being used to abrade a surface, the composite breaks down revealing unused abrasive 5 particles.
In one aspect of the invention, viz., where the abrasive composites are spaced-apart at constant pitch (constant peak- to-peak distance from centers of adjacent abrasive composites), the "adjacent composite"
10 will involve one nearest neighboring composite or multiple nearest neighboring composites equidistantly spaced from the abrasive composite which has the diffe~ent dimension thereto. However, in another aspect of the invention, if the abrasive composites are spaced 15 at a varied pitch, then it is possible, in that instance, for the "adjacent composite" to involve an abrasive composite which is not necessarily the closest composite as spaced from the abrasive composite having the different dimension thereto, as long as no 20 intervening abrasive structure is located on a direct line t:herebetween.
Backin~
~ backing can be conveniently used in this invention to provide a surface for deploying the 25 abrasive composites thereon, wherein such a backing has a front and back surface and can be any conventional abrasive backing. Examples of such include polymeric film, primed polymeric film, cloth, paper, vulcanized fiber, nonwovens, and combinations thereof. The backing 30 optionally may be a reinforced thermoplastic backing, such as described in the assignee's co-pending United States application No. 07/811,547 (Stout et al., filed 20 December 1991) or an endless belt as described in the assignee's co-pending U.S. application No.
35 07/919,541 (Benedict et al., filed 20 December 1991).
The backing may also contain a treatment or treatments S~BSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 to seal the backing and/or modify some physical properties of the backing. These treatments are well known in the art.
The backing may also have an attachment means on 5 its back surface to secure the resulting coated abrasive to a support pad or back-up pad. This attachment means can be a pressure sensitive adhesive or a loop fabric for a hook and loop attachment.
Alternatively, there may be a intermeshing attachment 10 system, such as described in the U.S. Patent No.
5,201,101 (Rouser et al.).
The back side of the abrasive article may also contain a slip resistant or frictional coating. An example of such a coating include compositions 15 containing an inorganic particulate (e.g., calcium carbonate or quartz) dispersed in an adhesive. An antistatic coating comprising materials such as carbon black or vanadium oxide also may be included in the abrasive article, if desired.
20 Abrasive Composit~
a. Abrasive ParticlQs The abrasive particles typically have a particle size ranging from about 0.1 to 1500 micrometers, usually between about 0.1 to 400 micrometers, 25 preferably between 0.1 to 100 micrometers and more preferably between 0.1 to 50 micrometers. It is preferred that the abrasive particles have a Mohs' hardness of at least about 8, more preferably above 9.
Examples of such abrasive particles include fused 30 aluminum oxide (which includes brown aluminum oxide, heat treated aluminum oxide, and white aluminum oxide), ceramic aluminum oxide, green silicon carbide, silicon carbide, chromia, alumina zirconia, diamond, iron oxide, ceria, cubic boron nitride, boron carbide, 35 garnet, and combinations thereof.
S~JBSTITUTE SHEET (~ULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 The term abrasive particles also encompasses when single abrasive particles are bonded together to form an abrasive agglomerate. Suitable abrasive agglomerates for this invention are further described 5 in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,311,489 (Kressner); 4,652,275 (Bloecher et al.) and 4,799,939 (Bloecher et al.).
It is also within the scope of this invention to have a surface coating on the abrasive particles. The surface coating may have many different functions. In 10 some instances the surface coatings increase adhesion to the binder, alter the abrading characteristics of the abrasive particle, and the like. Examples of surface coatings include coupling agents, halide salts, metal oxides including silica, refractory metal 15 nitri~des, refractory metal carbides, and the like.
In the abrasive composite there may also be diluent particles. The particle size of these diluent particles may be on the same order of magnitude as the abrasive particles. Examples of such diluent particles 20 include gypsum, marble, limestone, flint, silica, glass bubbles, glass beads, aluminum silicate, and the like.
b. Binder The abrasive particles are dispersed in an organic binder to form the abrasive composite. The organic 25 binder can be a thermoplastic binder, however, it is preferably a thermosetting binder. The binder is formed from a binder precursor. During the manufacture of the abrasive article, the thermosetting binder precursor is exposed to an energy source which aids in the 30 initiation of the polymerization or curing process.
Examples of energy sources include thermal energy and radiation energy which includes electron beam, - ultraviolet light, and visible light. After this polymerization process, the binder precursor is 35 converted into a solidified binder. Alternatively for a thermoplastic binder precursor, during the S~STlTlJTE SHE~ (RULE 26) WO95/07797 ~ t ~ ~: 9 8 q PCT~S94/00754 ~
manufacture of the abrasive article the thermoplastic binder precursor is cooled to a degree that results in solidification of the binder precursor. Upon solidification of the binder precursor, the abrasive 5 composite is formed.
The binder in the abrasive composite is generally also responsible for adhering the abrasive composite to the front surface of the backing. However, it some instances there may be an additional adhesive layer 10 between the front surface of the backing and the abrasive composite.
There are two main classes of thermosetting resins, condensation curable and addition polymerized resins. The preferred binder precursors are addition 15 polymerized resin because they are readily cured by exposure to radiation energy. Addition polymerized resins can polymerize through a cationic ~?ch~nism or a free radical m~r-h~n;~m. Depending upon the energy source that is utilized and the binder precursor 20 chemistry, a curing agent, initiator, or catalyst is sometimes preferred to help initiate the polymerization.
Examples of typical binders precursors include phenolic resins, urea-formaldehyde resins, melamine 25 formaldehyde resins, acrylated urethanes, acrylated epoxies, ethylenically unsaturated compounds, aminoplast derivatives having pendant unsaturated carbonyl groups, isocyanurate derivatives having at least one pendant acrylate group, isocyanate 30 derivatives having at least one pendant acrylate group, vinyl ethers, epoxy resins, and mixtures and combinations thereof. The term acrylate encompasses acrylates and methacrylates.
Phenolic resins are widely used in abrasive 35 article binders because of their thermal properties, availability, and cost. There are two types of SUBSTITUTE SHEET ~RI tLE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 ~ 9 PCT~S94/00754 phenolic resins, resole and novolac. Resole phenolic resins have a molar ratio of formaldehyde to phenol greater than or equal to one to one, typically between 1.5:1.0 to 3.0:1Ø Novolac resins have a molar ratio 5 of formaldehyde to phenol of less than one to one.
Examples of commercially available phenolic resins include those known by the tradenames "Durez" and "Varcum" from occidental Chemicals Corp.; "Resinox"
from Monsanto; "Aerofene" from Ashland Chemical Co. and 10 "Aerotap" from Ashland Chemical Co.
~ crylated urethanes are diacrylate esters of hydroxy terminated NCO extended polyesters or polyethers. Examples of commercially available acrylated urethanes include uvll~nANE 782, available 15 from Morton Thiokol Chemical, and CMD 6600, CMD 8400, and CMD 8805, available from Radcure Specialties.
Acrylated epoxies are diacrylate esters of epoxy resins, such as the diacrylate esters of bisphenol A
epoxy resin. Examples of commercially available 20 acry~ated epoxies include CMD 3500, CMD 3600, and CMD
3700, available from Radcure Specialities.
Ethylenically unsaturated resins include both monom~ric and polymeric compounds that contain atoms of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, and optionally, nitrogen 25 and the halogens. Oxygen or nitrogen atoms or both are generally present in ether, ester, urethane, amide, and urea groups. Ethylenically unsaturated compounds preferably have a molecular weight of less than about 4,000 and are preferably esters made from the reaction 30 of compounds containing aliphatic monohydroxy groups or aliphatic polyhydroxy groups and unsaturated carboxylic acids, such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, and the like. Representative examples of acrylate resins 35 include methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate styrene, divinylbenzene, vinyl toluene, ethylene glycol SUBST~TUTE S~EET (Rl~LE 26~
W095/07797 2 ~ q PCT~S94/007S4 diacrylate, ethylene glycol methacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, glycerol triacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol 5 methacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate and pentaerythritol tetraacrylate. Other ethylenically unsaturated resins include monoallyl, polyallyl, and polymethallyl esters and amides of carboxylic acids, such as diallyl phthalate, diallyl adipate, and 10 N,N-diallyladipamide. Still other nitrogen containing compounds include tris(2-acryloyl oxyethyl)iso-cyanurate, 1,3,5-tri(2-methyacryloxyethyl)- s-triazine, acrylamide, methylacrylamide, N-methylacrylamide, N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-vinylpyrrolidone, and 15 N-vinylpiperidone.
The aminoplast resins have at least one pendant alpha, beta-unsaturated carbonyl group per molecule or oligomer. These unsaturated carbonyl groups can be acrylate, methacrylate, or acrylamide type groups.
20 Examples of such materials include N-hydroxymethyl)-acrylamide, N,N'-oxydimethylene-bisacrylamide, ortho and para acrylamidomethylated phenol, acrylamido-methylated phenolic novolac, and combinations thereof.
Examples of these materials are further described in 25 U.S. Patent No. 4,903,440 (Larson et al.) and U.S.
Patent No. 5,236,472 (Kirk et al.).
Isocyanurate derivatives having at least one pendant acrylate group and isocyanate derivatives having at least one pendant acrylate group are further 30 described in U.S. Patent 4,652,274 (80ettcher et al.).
The preferred isocyanurate material is a triacrylate of tris(hydroxy ethyl) isocyanurate.
Epoxy resins have an oxirane and are polymerized by the ring opening. Such epoxide resins include 35 monomeric epoxy resins and oligomeric epoxy resins.
Examples of some preferred epoxy resins include SUBST~T~T~ S~EET (RUL~ 26) ~ WO 95/07797 2 1 7 0 q 8 9 PCT/US94/007S4 2,2-bis[4- (2,3-epoxypropoxy)-phenyl propane]
(diglycidyl ether of bisphenol A) and commercially available materials under the trade designation "Epon 828", "Epon 1004", and "Epon 1001F" available from 5 Shell Chemical Co., "DER-331'1, "DER-332", and "DER-334"
available from Dow Chemical Co. Other suitable epoxy resins include glycidyl ethers of phenol formaldehyde novolac (e.g., "DEN-431" and "DEN-428" available from Dow Chemical Co.).
The epoxy resins of the invention can polymerize via a cationic mechanism with the addition of an appropriate cationic curing agent. Cationic curing agents generate an acid source to initiate the polymerization of an epoxy resin. These cationic 15 curing agents can include a salt having an onium cation and a halogen cont~;ning a complex anion of a metal or metalloid. Other cationic curing agents include a salt having an organometallic complex cation and a halogen containing complex anion of a metal or metalloid which 20 are further described in U.S. Patent 4,751,138 (Tumey et al.) (column 6, line 65 to column 9, line 45).
Another example is an organometallic salt and an onium salt is described in U.S. Patent 4,985,340 (Palazzotto) (column 4 line 65 to column 14 line 50); European 25 Patent Applications 306,161 and 306,162. Still other cationic curing agents include an ionic salt of an organometallic complex in which the metal is selected from the elements of Periodic Group IVB, VB, VIB, VIIB
and VIIIB which is described in European Patent 30 Applications i09~851.
Regarding free radical curable resins, in some instances it is preferred that the abrasive slurry further comprise a free radical curing ~gent. However in the case of an electron beam energy source, the 35 curing agent is not always required because the electron beam itself generates free radicals.
~BSTIT~IT~ ~H~E~ (Rl~E 26) W095/07797 ~ t 7~ PCT~S94/00754 Examples of free radical thermal initiators include peroxides, e.g., benzoyl peroxide, azo compounds, benzophenones, and quinones. For either ultraviolet or visible light energy source, this curing 5 agent is sometimes referred to as a photoinitiator.
Examples of initiators, that when exposed to ultraviolet light generate a free radical source, include but are not limited to those selected from the group consisting of organic peroxides, azo compounds, 10 quinones, benzophenones, nitroso compounds, acryl halides, hydrozones, mercapto compounds, pyrylium compounds, triacrylimidazoles, bisimidazoles, chloroalkytriazines, benzoin ethers, benzil ketals, thioxanthones, and acetophenone derivatives, and 15 mixtures thereof. Examples of initiators that when exposed to visible radiation generate a free radical source, can be found in U.S. Patent No. 4,735,632 (Oxman et al.), entitled Coated Abrasive Binder Containing Ternary Photoinitiator System. The 20 preferred initiator for use with visible light is "Irgacure 369" commercially available from Ciba Geigy Corporation.
The weight ratios between the abrasive particles and binder can range between 5 to 95 parts abrasive 25 particles to 5 to 95 parts binder; more typically, 50 to 90 parts abrasive particles and 10 to 50 parts binder.
c. Additives The abrasive slurry can further comprise optional 30 additives, such as, for example, fillers (including grinding aids), fibers, lubricants, wetting agents, thixotropic materials, surfactants, pigments, dyes, antistatic agents, coupling agents, plasticizers, and suspending agents. The amounts of these materials are 35 selected to provide the properties desired. The use of these can affect the erodability of the abrasive SlJB~TITUTE SHEF~ (RU! E 26) ~ W095/07797 2 ~ ~9~9 PCT~S94/00754 composite. In some instances an additive is purposely added to make the abrasive composite more erodable, thereby expelling dulled abrasive particles and exposing new abrasive particles.
Examples of useful fillers for this invention include: metal carbonates (such as calcium carbonate {such as chalk, calcite, marl, travertine, marble and limestone}, calcium magnesium carbonate, sodium carbonate, magnesium carbonate), silica {such as 10 quart:z, glass beads, glass bubbles and glass fibers}
silicates {such as talc, clays, montmorillonite, feldspar, mica, calcium silicate, calcium metasilicate, sodium aluminosilicate, sodium silicate}, metal sulfates {such as calcium sulfate, barium sulfate, 15 sodium sulfate, aluminum sodium sulfate, aluminum sulfate}, gypsum, vermiculite, wood flour, aluminum trihydrate, carbon black, metal oxides {such as calcium oxide or lime, aluminum oxide, titanium oxide}, and metal sulfites {such as calcium sulfite}.
The term filler also encompasses materials that are known in the abrasive industry as grinding aids. A
grinding aid is defined as particulate material that the addition of which has a significant effect on the chemical and physical processes of abrading which 25 results in improved performance. Examples of chemical groups of grinding aids include waxes, organic halide compounds, halide salts and metals and their alloys.
The organic halide compounds will typically break down during abrading and release a halogen acid or a gaseous 30 halide compound. Examples of such materials include chlorinated waxes like tetrachloronaphtalene, pentachloronaphthalene; and polyvinyl chloride.
Examples of halide salts include sodium chloride, potassium cryolite, sodium cryolite, ammonium cryolite, 35 potassium tetrafluoroboate, sodium tetrafluoroborate, silicon fluorides, potassium chloride, magnesium SlJBST~TUT~ SH~T (Rl~L~ 2~) WO95/07797 2`t I-Q~q PCT~S94/00754 ~
chloride. Examples of metals include, tin, lead, bismuth, cobalt, antimony, cadmium, iron, and titanium.
Other miscellaneous grinding aids include sulfur, organic sulfur compounds, graphite, and metallic 5 sulfides.
Examples of antistatic agents include graphite, carbon black, vanadium oxide, humectants, and the like.
These antistatic agents are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,061,294 (Harmer et al.); 5,137,542 (Buch~n~n et 10 al.), and 5,203,884 (Bur-h~An et al.).
A coupling agent can provide an association bridge between the binder precursor and the filler particles or abrasive particles. Examples of coupling agents include silanes, titanates, and zircoaluminates. The 15 abrasive slurry preferably contains anywhere from about 0.01 to 3% by weight coupling agent.
An example of a suspending agent is an amorphous silica particle having a surface area less than 150 meters square/gram that is commercially available from 20 DeGussa Corp., under the trade name "OX-50".
Abrasive ComDosita 8hape Each abrasive composite has a precise shape associated with it. The precise shape is delimited by a distinct and discernible boundary, these terms being 25 defined hereinabove. These distinct and discernible boundaries are readily visible and clear when a cross-section of the abrasive article of the invention is P~m; ned under a microscope such as a scanning electron microscope, e.g., as shown in Figure 5. The distinct 30 and discernible boundaries of each abrasive composite form the outline or contour of the precise shapes of the present invention. These boundaries separate and distinguish one abrasive composite from another even when the abrasive composites abutt each other along a 35 common border at their bases.
S~lBSTlT~lTE SHtE~ (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7~ PCT~S~4/007s4 In comparison, in an abrasive composite that does not have a precise shape, the boundaries and edges are not definitive, e.g., where the abrasive composite sags before completion of its curing. Thus, the expression 5 "precisely-shaped", or the like, as used herein in describing the abrasive composites, also refers to abrasive composites having a shape that has been formed by curing the curable binder of a flowable mixture of abrasive particles and curable binder while the mixture 10 is both being borne on a backing and filling a cavity on the surface of a production tool. Such a precisly shaped abrasive composite would thus have precisely the same shape as that of the cavity. These cavities in a production tool are depicted in Figure 6.
A plurality of such composites provide three-dimensional shapes that project outward from the surface of the backing in an inverse pattern to that presented by the production tool. Each composite is defined by a well-defined boundary or perimeter, the 20 base portion of the boundary being the interface with the backing to which the precisely shaped composite is adhered. The remaining portion of the boundary is defined as the inverse shape of the cavity in the surface of the production tool in which the composite 25 is cured. The entire outer surface of the composite is confined, either by the backing or by the cavity, during its formation. Suitable methods and techniques for forming precisely-shaped composites are disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,152,917 (Pieper et al.).
This invention departs from U.S. Patent No.
5,152,917 (Pieper et al.), however, insofar as the provision of differing dimensioned shapes, among other things, in the array of abrasive composites. This proviso can be established by any convenient approach, 35 e.g., by arbitrarily assigning at least one dimensional variance, such as defined hereinbelow, between adjacent SUB~TITU~E SHE~T (R~LE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 ~ 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 ~
composite shapes in a portion or the whole of the array of composites for an abrasive article. An array of grooves can be formed in a surface of a master tool, e.g., by use of a diamond turning machine, from which 5 is produced a production tool having an array of cavity shapes, which, in turn, can receive and mold an abrasive slurry described herein, which are the inverse shape of the predetermined array of abrasive composite shapes. Alternatively, as described herein, a copy of a 10 desired pattern of variably dimensioned shapes of abrasive composites can be formed in the surface of a so-called metal master, e.g., aluminum, copper, bronze, or a plastic master such as acrylic plastic, either of which can be nickel-plated after grooving, as by 15 diamond turning grooves to leave upraised portions corresponding to the desired predetermined shapes of the abrasive composites. Then, flexible plastic production tooling can be formed, in general, from the master by a method explained in U.S. Patent No.
20 5,152,917 (Pieper et al). As a result, the plastic production tooling has a surface which includes indentations having the inverse shape of the abrasive composites to be formed therewith. Alternatively, the metal master can be manufactured by diamond turning 25 grooves to leave the desired shapes in a metal surface which is amenable to diamond turning, such as aluminum, copper or bronze, and then nickel plating the grooved surface to provide the metal master. Exemplary terh~iques for making the varying dimensioned abrasive 30 composites will be described in greater detail hereinbelow.
Regarding the construction of the abrasive composites per se, referring to Figure 1 for illustrative purposes, the abrasive composite 12 has a 35 boundary 15. The boundary or boundaries associated with the shape result in one abrasive composite being SUBST~ITE SHEET ~RllLE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 ~ 70989 PCT~S94/00754 physically separated to some extent from another adjacent abrasive composite. To form an individual abrasive composite, a portion of the boundaries forming the shape of the abrasive composite must be separated 5 from one another. Note that in Figure 1, the base or a portion of the abrasive composite closest to the backing can abutt with an adjacent abrasive composite.
Referring to Figure 2, the abrasive article 20 of the invention comprises a backing 21 having a plurality of 10 abrasive composites 22 bonded to the backing. The abrasive composites comprises a plurality of abrasive particles 23 that are dispersed in a binder 24. In this aspect of the invention, there are open spaces 25 between adjacent composites. It is also within the 15 scope of this invention to have a combination of abrasive composites bonded to a backing in which some of adjacent abrasive composites abutt, while other adjac~ent abrasive composites have open spaces between them.
In some instances, e.g., pyramidal non-cylindrical shapes, the boundaries forming the sides of the shape also are planar. For such shapes that have multiple planes, there are at least four planes (inclusive of three sides and the bottom or base). The number of 25 planes for a given shape can vary depending upon the desired geometry, for instance the number of planes can range from four to over 20. Generally, there are between four to ten planes, preferably between four to six planes. These planes intersect to form the desired 30 shape and the angles at which these planes intersect will determine the shape dimensions. Referring to Figure 1, the abrasive composite 12 has a boundary 15 which is planar. The side planes 15A and 15b intersect at an angle ~, with cross-section 15C facing the viewer 35 and is coplanar with the page.
SU~STITUTE SHEEr (RUL~ 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 ~ 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 ~
A key aspect of this invention is that at least one the abrasive composites has a different dimension from another abrasive composite in the array.
Preferably, the different dimension is established 5 between at least one pair of adjacent composites, and even more preferably, established for each and every pair of adjacent composites provided on the surface of the abrasive article. The terminology of "every pair"
of adjacent composites encompasses an arbitrary 10 consideration of every composite on the surface of the abrasive article as paired with its adjacent composite.
In general, at least 10% of the pairs of adjacent composites have a different dimension therebetween, preferably at least 30%, more preferably at least 50%.
15 Most preferably, substantially 100% of the abrasive composites have a different ~; e~ion from its respective paired adjacent abrasive composite. The result of this proviso of different dimensions between abrasive composites, viz. between adjacent pairs of 20 abrasive composites, results in an abrasive article that produces a relatively finer surface finish on the workpiece being abraded or refined. Since the ~i ^ncions of adjacent abrasive composites vary, there is a reduced tendency for scribed grooves to be 2S imparted by the precisely abrasive composites into the workpiece surface. In general, if less than 10% of the pairs of abrasive composites have an adjacent composite that has a different dimension, the effect of the invention of decreasing scribing while achieving high-30 cut rates and fine finishes may not be satisfactorilyrealized. In general, the number of pairs of adjacent abrasive composites that have different dimensions is selected to minimize or reduce scribing. The percentage of the total abrasive composites that this number of 35 pairs represents will depend upon several factors such as the workpiece type, abrading interface pressure, SUBSTiTUTE SHEET (R~LE 26) ~ T ~0 q g 9 W095/07797 PCT~S94/007S4 abrasive article rotation speed and other typical abrading conditions.
It is within the scope of this invention to have some, but never all, of the abrasive composites present 5 on the surface which have identical shapes. However, the abrasive composites having identical shapes, if present, preferably should not be located directly adjacent to or next to one another in order to fully realize the benefits of the invention. For instance, 10 two abrasive composites in the abrasive article may have shapes defined by same dimensions, but, preferably, the two abrasive composites should be separated from one another in the array of composites by at least one intervening abrasive composite that 15 differs in a dimension from each.
There must be at least one dimension associated with at least one of the abrasive composites that is different from another abrasive composite. However, it also is within the scope of this invention that there 20 are two or more different dimensions therebetween.
These dimensions can be varied in a variety of ways, such as by providing a different length of an edge at the intersection of two planar surfaces of a shape of a composite; by providing a different angle formed at the 25 meeting edge of two adjacent planar surfaces of a shape of a composite; or by providing different types of geometrical shapes for the abrasive composites to provide either a different edge length and/or a different angle.
If an edge length is varied to provide the different dimension for purposes of the invention, in one embodiment, the length or dimensions of the edges in composites, particularly adjacent composites, each having a pyramidal shape as the geometrical shape and a 35 common height of between 25 and 1020 micrometers, generally can differ from at least about 1 to about 500 SllBS~lTlJ~E SH~El (R~LE 26) W095/07797 ~ PCT~S94/007S4 micrometers, and more preferably between 5 to 250 micrometers. In one embodiment, the length of the at least one edge of a first composite in the array has a length which varies with respect to the length of any 5 edge of a second composite in a ratio ~etween lO:1 to 1:10, not inclusive of 1:1, and preferably as between two adjacent composites.
More generally, the abrasive composite shape of this invention can be any convenient shape, but it is 10 preferably a three-dimensional regular geometric shape such as a cubic, prismatic (e.g., triangular, quadrilateral, hexagonal, etc.), conical, truncated conical (flat top), cylindrical, pyramidal, truncated pyramidal (flat top) and the like. The geometrical 15 shape of adjacent abrasive composites can be varied, e.g. pyramidal next to prismatic, in order to provide the requisite dimensional variance therebetween. In one embodiment of the invention, the shapes of the abrasive composites, e.g., pyramidal, all are provided with the 20 same total height value, measured from the backing, in a range of from about 50 micrometers to about 1020 micrometers.
A preferred geometrical shape is a pyramid and the pyramid can be a four or five side sided (inclusive of 25 the base) pyramid. In one preferred embodiment, all composite shapes are pyramidal. Even more preferably, the dimensional variance is achieved between adjacent pyramidal-shaped composites by varying the angle formed by a side surface with the backing in adjacent 30 pyramids. For example, angles ~ and ~ formed by the sides of adjacent pyramidal shaped composites, such as depicted in Figure 1, are different angles from each other and each have a value of between 0 and 90 (i.e.
non-inclusive of 0 and 90). Preferably, the angle 35 or ~ formed between a side surface of the pyramidal-shaped composites and an imaginary plane 17 (Figure 1) SUBSTlTUT~ SHEEr (R~LE 26) ~ W095/077g7 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 ext~n~;ng normal to the intersection of the respective side surface and the backing should be greater than or equal to 8, but less than or equal to 45. From a practical standpoint, angles less than 8 may release 5 cured composite shapes from the production tool with greater difficulty. On the other hand, angles greater than 45 may unduly enlarge the spacing between adjacent abrasive composites such that insufficient abrading surfaces are provided over the area of the 10 backing.
It also is preferable to select angles for ~ and wherein each have a value between 0 and 90 and which differ in magnitude by at least about 1, and more preferably at least about 5.
It is also preferred to form pyramidal shapes for the abrasive composites where two side surfaces of each pyramid meet at the apex of each pyramid to form a material-included angle ~ (see Figure 1) in a cross-sectional view of the pyramid having a value of greater 20 than or equal to 25 and less than or equal to 90. The lower value of 25 may be a practical limit since it can be difficult to form a peak or apex shape for an abrasive composite which is sharp and less than 25 with the slurry and production tool methodology 25 described herein. To more fully realize the benefits of the invention, this proviso with respect to material-included angle ~ should be used together with the above-mentioned proviso that intervening angles and ~ between adjacent composites be provided as 30 different and randomly selected between oo and 90O as explained hereinabove.
Further, in any individual abrasive composite, the angles made by the various surface planes with the backing do not necessarily have to be the same for a 35 given composite. For instance in a four sided pyramid (one base and three side surfaces), the angles formed SlJBST~TUTE SH~T (RU~ 26) WOg~/07797 ~Q~ PCT~S94/007S4 by any of the first, second and third side planes with the backing can be different from each other.
Naturally, the angle at which the side surfaces intersect with each other will also vary as the angle 5 formed between the side surface and the backing are varied.
Also, in the embodiment of this invention where the dimensional variance between adjacent composites is established by varying side surface angles between lO adjacent abrasive composites, such as angles ~ and ~
(Figure 1), it is preferred that the respective angles chosen for each of ~ and ~ between adjacent composites are not repeated and constant throughout the array of abrasive composites, which is believed to even further 15 ensure no resonance is created between the workpiece and the abrasive article. Therefore, it is more desirable to permit and provide different values for each of ~ and ~ between 0 and 90 as one proceeds from one pair adjacent composites to the next immediate pair 20 of adjacent composites along either the widthwise or lengthwise direction of the abrasive article (e.g., see Figure 8). This change in the values of a and ~ between different sets of adjacent composites in the array can be effected in any convenient manner, such as by 25 randomly picking the values for each of ~ and ~ between the range O and 90 degrees.
For example, if ~, as the right half angle (Figure 1), can be randomly selected in the range of between 0 and 90 for an abrasive composite in one row of 30 composites, then ~, as the left half angle facing ~, is randomly chosen for the adjacent abrasive composite in the adjacent row of composites; and then, as one preceeds to the next pair of adjacent abrasive composites in either the widthwise or lengthwise 35 direction along the rows of composites in the array, a new ~, as left half angle, is randomly selected between SUBST~TUT~ SHEET (Rl~LI~ 26~
~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 0 and 90 degrees and then a new value for a, as the facing right half angle, of the adjacent composite can be randomly selected in the range of 0 to 90 degrees, and so forth throughout the array. This practice is 5 desirable in order to provide a more uniform distribution of angles between 0 and 90 degrees throughout the array of abrasive composites in the article.
The actual selection of the angles ~ and ~, and ~, 10 throughout the array of abrasive composites, randomly and subject to the preferred constraints described herein, can be accomplished in any convenient manner, for example, by systematic random selections of angle values by draw within the preferred numerical 15 constraint mentioned herein. These systematic selections for an array, can be facilitated and expedited by using a common computer, e.g. a desktop computer, using the angle constraints described herein to delimit the range of angle values from which the 20 computer makes a random choice. Algorithms for selection of random numbers are generally known in the statistical and computer fields, and have been adapted to this aspect of the invention. For instance, the well known linear congruential method for generating 25 pseudorandom numbers can be applied towards randomly selecting the angles ~ and ~. The application and implementation of random number generation for select:ing angles for the side faces of the abrasive composite shapes in the present application is 30 exemplified in the computer source code described in the APPENDIX hereinafter.
In any event, the angle values, once so selected for the abrasive composites in the array, can be used to determine and predicate the pattern and shapes of 35 indentations formed by a diamond turning machine in the surface of a metal production tool or production tool, S~IBSTITIJ~E SHEEl (RI~I~E 26) Wos~c7~7 ~ t ~8q PCT~S94/00754 which, in turn, can be used to make the abrasive composite articles of the invention by methods described herein.
In some instances it is preferred to have the 5 height and geometrical shape of all the composites as the same. This height is the distance of the abrasive composite from the backing to its outermost point before the abrasive article is used. If the height and shape are constant, it is then preferred to have the 10 angle between planes vary.
In order to achieve a fine surface finish on the workpiece, it is also preferred that the peaks of the abrasive composites do not align in a column which is parallel to the abrading direction performed in the 15 machine direction. If the abrasive composite peaks align in a column parallel to the abrading direction, this tends to result in grooves imparted to the workpiece and a coarser surface finish. Thus, it is preferred that the abrasive composites be offset from 20 one another to prevent this alignment.
In general there are at least 5 individual abrasive composites per square centimeter. In some instances, there may be at least about 100 individual abrasive composites/square centimeter or higher, and 25 more preferably, about 2,000 to 10,000 abrasive composites/square centimeter. There is no operational upper limit on the density of the abrasive composites;
although, from a practical standpoint, at some point it may not be possible to increase the cavity density 30 and/or form precisely shaped cavities in the surface of the production tooling preferably used to make the array of abrasive composites. In general, this number of abrasive composites result in an abrasive article that has a relatively high rate of cut, a long life, 35 but also results in a relatively fine surface finish on the workpiece being abraded. Additionally, with this SUBST~TUT~ SHE~ (RUL~ 26~
W095/07797 ~ 1 70~89 PCT~S94/00754 number of abrasive composites there is a relatively low unit force per each abrasive composite. In some instances, this can result in better, more consistent, breakdown of the abrasive composite.
5 Method of Ma~ing the Abr~sive Articla Although additional details will be described later herein on the methods of making the abrasive article of the invention, in general, the first step in making the abrasive article is to prepare an abrasive 10 slurry. The abrasive slurry is made by combining together by any suitable mixing technique the binder precursor, the abrasive particles, and the optional additives. Examples of mixing techniques include low shear and high shear mixing, with high shear mixing 15 being preferred. Ultrasonic energy may also be utilized in combination with the mixing step to lower the abrasive slurry viscosity. Typically, the abrasive particles are gradually added into the binder precursor. The amount of air bubbles in the abrasive 20 slurry can be minimized by pulling a vacuum during the mixing step, for example, by employing conventional vacuum-assisted methods and equipment.
In some instances it is preferred to heat, generally in the range of 30 to 70C, the abrasive 25 slurry to lower the viscosity. It is important the abrasive slurry have a rheology that coats well and in which the abrasive particles and other fillers do not settle.
If a thermosetting binder precursor is employed, 30 the energy source can be thermal energy or radiation energy depending upon the binder precursor chemistry.
If a thermoplastic binder precursor is employed the thermoplastic is cooled such that it becomes solidified and the abrasive composite is formed. Other more 35 detailed aspects of the method(s) to make the abrasive article of the invention will be described hereinbelow.
SUBST~TUTE SH~El (RU~ 2~) W095/07797 ~ ~ ~a~ PCT~S94/007S4 P~oduction Tool A production tool is important, from both practical and technological standpoints, in making an abrasive article of the invention, especially in view 5 of the relatively small sizes of the abrasive composites. The production tool contains a plurality of cavities. These cavities are essentially the inverse shape of the abrasive composite desired and are responsible for generating the shape of the abrasive lO composites. The dimensions of the cavities are selected to provide the desired shape and dimensions of the abrasive composites. If the shape or dimensions of the cavities are not properly fabricated, the resulting production tool will not provide the desired dimensions 15 for the abrasive composites.
The cavities can be present in a dot like pattern with spaces between adjacent cavities or the cavities can abutt against one another. The cavities butt up against one another to facilitate release of the shaped 20 and cured abrasive slurry. Additionally, the shape of the cavities is selected such that the cross-sectional area of the abrasive composite decreases in the direction away from the backing.
In a more preferred embodiment of the production 25 tool, the production tool has two opposing parallel side edges bounding an array of cavities so configured to provide differing dimensions in the shapes of adjacent abrasive composites formed therewith by methods described herein over a distinct segment of 30 length of the abrasive article, in either a length and/or width direction of the abrasive article, and then this predetermined pattern of differing composite shapes can be repeated at least once more or repeatedly along the length andtor width of the abrasive article, 35 if desired and convenient.
SUBSTIT~T~ StlEEr (RIJ~E 26) W095/07797 2 ~ 7~ ! PCT~S94/00754 For example, Figure 7 is a top view representation of a production tool 70 that can be used to make an abrasive article of the invention. The side edges 71 of the production tool are parallel to the machine 5 direction (not shown) of the production tool and are perpendicular to the transverse width direction of the production tool. Cavitites 74 are delimited by intersecting upraised portions represented by solid lines 72 and 73. The production tool has six distinct 10 groups A, B, C, D, E and F of cavities, wherein in each group the cavities are aligned in parallel rows bounded by upraised portions 72, wherein the upraised portions 72 and 73 are the nondeformed (noncavitated) remainder of the tooling sheet. These groups A-E are arranged 15 head-to-tail along the length of the tooling, as shown in Figure 7. The rows of cavities in each group that are aligned most closely with side edges 71 trace imaginary lines ext~nding at non-parallel (nonzero) angles to the machine direction of the production tool, 20 and which angles differ from group A to group B to group C, and so forth up to group F. The angles of the rows of cavities (and intervening upraised portions 72) made with the side edges 71 should be established as between 0 to 90. Scribing problems can arise at 25 either oo or 90 angles for rows of cavities with the side edges 71. Preferably, angles of 5 to 85 are selected for the angles of the rows of cavities with the machine direction more assuredly avoid scribing problems.
The angles of the rows of cavities preferably alternate between clockwise and counterclockwise directionality from group to group, as shown in Figure - 7. The angle formed between rows of cavities and upraised portions 72 and the side edges 71 can be 35 selected to be the same or different in absolute magnitude from set to set.
~STlTU~ SHEEr (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 ~ ~ ~ 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 An abrasive article formed with production tool 70 by methods described herein will have an array of abrasive composites formed in the inverse shape to the surface profile presented by the array of cavities in 5 the production tool, such production tool 70. By arranging rows of cavities at angles in the production tooling by means of arrangements such as exemplified in Figure 7, scribing effects can be minimized in the abrasive article made thereby.
Alternatively, the cavities in the production tool can be arranged to be laterally offset, i.e., nonaligned, from one another in the direction advancing parallel to the side edges of the production tool (nondepicted). That is, this embodiment provides an 15 optional manner of forming an array of abrasive composites and intervening grooves which are not arranged in rows which extend parallel to the the side edges of the abrasive article. Instead, the abrasive composites are staggered from each other and non-20 aligned when viewed from the front of the abrasivearticle into the direction parallel to the side edges of the abrasive article.
The production tool can be a belt, a sheet, a continuous sheet or web, a coating roll such as a 25 rotogravure roll, a sleeve mounted on a coating roll, or die. The production tool can be composed of metal, (e.g., nickel), metal alloys (e.g., nickel alloys), plastic (e.g., polypropylene, an acrylic plastic), or any other conveniently formable material. The metal 30 production tool can be fabricated by any conventional technique such as engraving, hobbing, electroforming, diamond turning, and the like.
A thermoplastic production tool can be made by replication off a metal master tool. The metal master 35 will have the inverse pattern desired for the production tool. The metal master can be made with the SUBSTITlJTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 ~ 9 ~ 9 PCT~S94/00754 same basic t~chn;ques useful in directly making the production tool, e.g., by diamond turning a metal surface. In the event of use of a met~l master, a thermoplastic sheet material can be heated and 5 optionally along with the metal master such that the thermoplastic material is embossed with the surface pattern presented by the metal master by pressing the two surfaces together. The thermoplastic can also be extruded or cast onto to the metal master and then 10 pressed. The thermoplastic material is cooled to solidify and produce the production tool. Examples of preferred thermoplastic production tool materials include polyester, polycarbonates, polyvinyl chloride, polypropylene, polyethylene and combinations thereof.
Alternatively, a plastic production tool can be directly made, without the need of a master by engraving or diamond turning a predetermined array of cavities, which have the inverse shape of the abrasive composites desired, into a surface of the plastic 20 sheet. If a thermoplastic production tool is utilized, then care must be taken not to generate excessive heat, particularly during the solidifying step, that may distort the thermoplastic production tool. Other suitable methods of production tooling and metal 25 masters are discussed in commonly assigned U.S. Patent Application No. 08/004,929 (Spurgeon et al.), filed 14 December 1993.
For example, a preferred method of making a polymeric production tool of the invention of the type 30 depicted in Figure 7 involves the use of a nickel-plated metal master configured in a drum form. Several flat sections of nickel-plated master, each about 30 centimeters in length, with the varied shapes of indentations corresponding to the shapes desired for 35 the abrasive composites are provided in a surface thereof, are produced by diamond turning with the aid SUBST~TUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W09~7/~7 ~ ~ ~Q~ PCT~S94/007S4 of a computer directing the cutting action performed by the diamond turning machine. These sections of metal master are welded together head-to-tail, with the grooves of section being at a non-zero angle to the 5 grooves of the next adjacent section. This chain of sections is then fixed to a drum so that the composites are continuous around the circumference of the drum.
Care should be taken to minimize any weld seams from distending out from between the sections and at the 10 point of joining. The production tool is cast by extruding polymeric resin onto the drum and passing the extrudant between a nip roll and the drum, and then cooling the extrudant to form a production tool in sheet form having an array of cavities formed on the 15 surface thereof in inverse correspondence to the surface indentations presented by the master on the drum. This process can be conducted continuously to produce a polymeric tool of any desired length.
EnerqY 8Ources When the abrasive slurry comprises a thermosetting binder precursor, the binder precursor is cured or polymerized. This polymerization is generally initiated upon exposure to an energy source. Examples of energy sources include thermal energy and radiation 25 energy. The amount of energy depends upon several factors such as the binder precursor chemistry, the dimensions of the abrasive slurry, the amount and type of abrasive particles and the amount and type of the optional additives. For thermal energy, the 30 temperature can range from about 30 to 150C, generally between 40 to 120C. The time can range from about 5 minutes to over 24 hours. The radiation energy sources include electron beam, ultraviolet light, or visible light. Electron beam radiation, which is also known as 35 ionizing radiation, can be used at an energy level of about 0.1 to about 10 Mrad, preferably at an energy Sl lBSTITl~TE StlEET (RI~LE 26) WO9S/07797 2 1 7 0 9 ~ 9 PCT~S94/00754 level of about 1 to about 10 Mrad. Ultraviolet radiation refers to non-particulate radiation having a wavelength within the range of about 200 to about 400 nanometers, preferably within the range of about 250 to 5 400 nanometers. It is preferred that 300 to 600 Watt/inch (120-240 Watt/cm) ultraviolet lights are used. Visible radiation refers to non-particulate radiation having a wavelength within the range of about 400 to about 800 nanometers, preferably in the range of 10 about 400 to about 550 nanometers. It is preferred that 300 to 600 Watt/inch (120-240 Watt/cm) visible lights are used.
One method to make the abrasive article of the invention is illustrated in Figure 3. Backing 41 15 leaves an unwind station 42 and at the same time the production tool 46 leaves an unwind station 45.
Cavities (not depicted) formed in the upper surface of production tool 46 are coated and filled with an abrasive slurry by means of coating station 44.
20 Alternatively, coating station 44 can be relocated to deposit the slurry on backing 41 instead of the production tool before reaching drum 43 and the same ensuing steps are followed as used for coating the production tooling as described below. Either way, it 25 is possible to heat the abrasive slurry (not shown) and/or subject the slurry to ultrasonics prior to coating to lower the viscosity. The coating station can be any conventional coating means such as drop die coater, knife coater, curtain coater, vacuum die coater 30 or a die coater. During coating the formation of air bubbles should be minimized. The preferred coating t~ch~;que uses a vacuum die coater, which can be of the type such as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,594,865;
4,959,265 and 5,077,870. After the production tool is 35 coated, the backing and the abrasive slurry are brought into contact by any means such that the abrasive slurry SUBST~TUTE SHEET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7Q~q PCT~S94/00754 wets the front surface of the backing. In Figure 3, the abrasive slurry is brought into contact with the backing by means of contact nip roll 47, and contact nip roll 47 forces the resulting construction against 5 support drum 43. Next, any convenient form of energy 48 is transmitted into the abrasive slurry that is adequate to at least partially cure the binder precursor. The term partial cure is meant that the binder precursor is polymerized to such a state that 10 the abrasive slurry does not flow from an inverted test tube. The binder precursor can be fully cured once it is removed from the production tool by any energy source. The production tool is rewound on mandrel 49 so that the production tool can be reused again.
15 Additionally, abrasive article 120 is wound on mandrel 121. If the binder precursor is not fully cured, the binder precursor can then be fully cured by either time and/or exposure to an energy source. Additional steps to make the abrasive article according to this first 20 method is further described in U.S. Patent No.
5,152,917 (Pieper et al.) or the above-mentioned U.S.
Patent Application No. 08/004,929 (Spurgeon et al.).
Other guide rolls are used where convenient and are designated rolls 40.
Relative to this first method, it is preferred that the binder precursor is cured by radiation energy.
The radiation energy can be transmitted through the production tool or backing so long as the production tool or backing does not appreciably absorb the 30 radiation energy. Additionally, the radiation energy source should not appreciably degrade the production tool. It is preferred to use a thermoplastic production tool and ultraviolet or visible light.
As mentioned above, in a variation of this first 35 method, the abrasive slurry can be coated onto the backing and not into the cavities of the production SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 ~ 7 ~ ~ & q PCT~S94/00754 tool. The abrasive slurry coated backing is then brought into contact with the production tool such that the abrasive slurry flows into the cavities of the production tool. The remaining steps to make the 5 abrasive article are the same as detailed above.
A second method for making the abrasive article is illustrated in Figure 4. The production tool 55 is provided in the outer surface of a drum, e.g., as a sleeve which is secured around the circumference of a 10 drum in separate sheet form (e.g., as a heat-shrunk nickel form) in any convenient manner. Backing 51 leaves an unwind station 52 and the abrasive slurry is coated into the cavities of the production tool 55 by means of the coating station 53. The abrasive slurry 15 can be coated onto the backing by any technique such as drop die coater, roll coater, knife coater, curtain coater, vacuum die coater, or a die coater. Again, it is possible to heat the abrasive slurry and/or subject the slurry to ultrasonics prior to coating to lower the 20 viscosity. During coating the formation of air bubbles should be minimized. Then, the backing and the production tool cont~; n; ng the abrasive slurry are brought into contact by a nip roll 56 such that the abrasive slurry wets the front surface of the backing.
25 Next, the binder precursor in the abrasive slurry is at least partially cured by exposure to an energy source 57. After this at least partial cure, the abrasive slurry is converted to an abrasive composite that is bonded or adhered to the backing. The resulting 30 abrasive article 59 is stripped and removed from the production tool at nip rolls 58 and wound onto a rewind station 60. In this method, the energy source can be thermal energy or radiation energy. If the energy source is either ultraviolet light or visible light, 35 the backing should be transparent to ultraviolet or visible light. An example of such a backing is SU~STITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) WO9~/07797 ~ t 7 B ~ ~ ~ PCT~S94100754 polyester backing. Other guide and contact rolls can be used where convenient and are designated rolls 50.
In another variation of this second method, the abrasive slurry can be coated directly onto the front 5 surface of the backing by moving coating station 53 to a location upstream from roll 56. The abrasive slurry coated backing is then brought into contact with the production tool such that the abrasive slurry wets into the cavities of the production tool. The remaining lO steps to make the abrasive article are the same as detailed above.
After the abrasive article is made, it can be flexed and/or humidified prior to converting. The abrasive article can be converted into any desired form 15 such as a cone, endless belt, sheet, disc, etc. before the abrasive article is put into service.
Method of Refininq ~ ~orkpioce Surface Another embodiment of this invention pertains to a method of refining a workpiece surface. This method 20 involves bringing into frictional contact the abrasive article of this invention with a workpiece. The term refine means that a portion of the workpiece is abraded away by the abrasive article. Additionally, the surface finish associated with the workpiece surface is 25 reduced after this refining process. One typical surface finish measurement is Ra; Ra is the arithmetic surface finish generally measured in microinches or micrometers. The surface finish can be measured by a profilometer, such as that available under the trade 30 designation Perthometer or Surtronic.
Workpiece The workpiece can be any type of material such as metal, metal alloy, exotic metal alloy, ceramic, glass, wood, wood like material, composites, painted surface, 35 plastic, reinforced plastic, stone, and combinations thereof. The workpiece may be flat or may have a shape SUBST~TUTE S~EET (RU~E 26) ~ W095/07797 ~-~ 2 1 7~89 PCT~S94/00754 or contour associated with it. Examples of workpieces include glass ophthalmic lenses, plastic ophthalmic lenses, glass television screens, metal automotive components, plastic components, particle board, cam 5 shafts, crank shafts, furniture, turbine blades, painted automotive components, magnetic media, and the like/
Depending upon the application, the force at the abrading interface can range from about 0.1 kg to over 10 1000 kg. Generally this range is between 1 kg to 500 kg of force at the abrading interface. Also depending upon the application, there may be a liquid present duri~g abrading. This liquid can be water and/or an organic compound. Examples of typical organic 15 compounds include lubricants, oils, emulsified organic compounds, cutting fluids, soaps, or the like. These liquids may also contain other additives such as defoamers, degreasers, corrosion inhibitors, or the like. The abrasive article may oscillate at the 20 abrading interface during use. In some instances, this oscillation may result in a finer surface on the workpiece being abraded.
An abrasive composite having an adjacent abrasive composite with a different dimension attributes to this 25 relatively fine surface finish. Since a portion of the abrasive composites have different dimensions, the abrasive composites may not perfectly align in a row from the perspective of the apices of pyramidal shapes and the like. For example, Figure 8 includes a 30 representative topographical top view (and side views) of an abrasive article 85 of the invention wherein an abras:ive composite therein is designated 80 having a face ~2 and apex 81. As seen in Figure 8, the pyramidal shapes, as a whole, align in rows, and therefore, the 35 apices of the abrasive composites are aligned irrespective of the differences in side ~; ~ncions SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RU-~ 26) W095/07797 2~i~Q~ PCT~S94/007S4 ~
between adjacent abrasive composites facing each other across common grooves. This arrangement results in scratches imparted into the workpiece by the abrasive composites which are continuously crossed over. This 5 continuous crossing of previous scratches results, in the aggregate, in the finer surface finish.
The abrasive article of the invention can be used by hand or used in combination with a machine. At least one or both of the abrasive article and the 10 workpiece is moved relative to the other. The abrasive article can be converted into a belt, tape rolls, disc, sheet, and the like. For belt applications, the two free ends of an abrasive sheet are joined together and a splice is formed. It is also within the scope of 15 this invention to use a spliceless belt. Generally the endless abrasive belt traverses over at least one idler roll and a platen or contact wheel. The hardness of the platen or contact wheel is adjusted to obtain the desired rate of cut and workpiece surface finish. The 20 abrasive belt speed ranges anywhere from about 150 to 5000 meters per minute, generally between 500 to 3000 meters per minute. Again this belt speed depends upon the desired cut rate and surface finish. The belt dimensions can range from about 5 mm to 1 meter wide 25 and from about 5 cm to 10 meters long. Abrasive tapes are continuous lengths of the abrasive article. They can range in width from about 1 mm to 1 meter, generally between 5 mm to 25 cm. The abrasive tapes are usually unwound, traverse over a support pad that 30 forces the tape against the workpiece and then rewound.
The abrasive tapes can be continuously feed through the abrading interface and can be indexed. The abrasive disc, which also includes what is known in the abrasive art as "daisies", can range from about 50 mm to 1 meter 35 in diameter. Typically abrasive discs are secured to a back-up pad by an attachment means. These abrasive SUBSTiTU~E SH~ET (RULE 26) 21 7098~
discs can rotate between 100 to 20,000 revolutions per minute, typically between 1,000 to 15,000 revolutions per minute.
The features and advantages of the present 5 invention will be further illustrated by the following non-limiting examples. All parts, percentages, ratios, etc, in the examples are by weight unless otherwise indicated.
~xperimental Proc~lu ~
The following abbreviations are used throughout:
TMPTA: trimethylol propane triacrylate;
TATHEIC: triacrylate of tris(hydroxy ethyl) isocyanurate;
PH2: 2-benzyl-2-N,N-dimethylamino-1-(4-morpholinophenyl)-1-butanone, commercially available from Ciba Geigy Corp. under the trade designation "Irgacure 369";
ASF: amorphous silica filler, commercially available from DeGussa under the trade designation "OX-50";
FA0: fused heat treated aluminum oxide;
WA0: white fused aluminum oxide; and SCA: silane coupling agent, 3-methacryloxy-propyltrimethoxysilane, commercially available from Union Carbide under the trade designation "A--174".
General Procedure for MA1~; nq the Abrasive Artiale An abrasive slurry was prepared that contained 20.3 parts TMPTA, 8.7 parts TATHEIC, 0.3 parts PH2, part ASF, 1 part SCA and 69 parts of grade P-320 FAO.
The slurry was mixed for 20 minutes at 1200 rpm using a high shear mixer.
The production tool was a continuous web made from a polypropylene sheet material commercially available 35 from Exxon under the trade designation "PolyPro 3445".
The production tool was embossed off of a nickel-plated SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RU-~E 26) W09~7~57 2 1 7~q8q PCT~S94/00754 master. The master tool was made by diamond cutting a pattern of varying dimension grooves and indentations according to the computer programs described in the APPENDIX, and then nickel plated. The APPENDIX includes 5 the source code f or f our computer programs, which, in general, comprises a f irst program entitled "VARI-l.BAS", which generated and determined random left and right angles for side surfaces of five sided pyramidal shapes and also the material included angles for these 10 Sh~p~s; the second program entitled "VARI-STAT.BAS"
statistically tallied the number and values of the left, right, and material included angles in x and y coordinates in the array of shapes to assure randomness; the third program entitled "TOPVIEW.BAS"
15 took the random angle file and calculated where the valleys and peaks appear for the shapes having the angles determined by the first program for a square inch (6.5 c*) and printed out a display on a computer screen or printer of the topography of the array of 20 shapes; and the fourth program "MAKETAPE.BAS" took the determined angles and generated a code to control the number and type of grooves required to be cut by the diamond turning machine to make a 22.5 inch (57 cm) wide pattern of random shapes generated by the first 25 program.
In general, the production tool, as made from the master tool made using the above-mentioned four programs, contained an array of cavities that were inverted five sided pyramids (inclusive of the mouth of 30 the cavity as a "base") that had a constant depth of about 355 micrometers but varied in ~i~^ncion between 8 and 45 degrees for adjacent cavities in terms of the angle made by side faces with the intersection of a plane exten~;ng normal to the plane of tool and the 35 material included angle or apex angle of each composite was at least 25 degrees.
SUBSTITUTE S~EET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 The abrasive article was made by a method and arrangement generally depicted in Figure 3. This process was a continuous process that operated at about 15.25 meters/minute. The backing was a J weight rayon 5 backing that contained a dried latex/phenolic presize coating to seal the backing. The abrasive slurry was knife-coated onto a production tool with a 76 micrometer knife gap (3 mil) and about a 15 cm wide coating area onto the production tool. The nip 10 pressure, such as exerted by roll 47 in Figure 3, between the production tool and the backing was about 40 pounds. The energy source was one visible-light lamp, which contained a V-bulb made by Fusion Systems, Co., which operated at 600 Watts/inch (240 Watt/cm).
15 After curing the abrasive slurry, the resulting coated abrasive was thermally cured for 12 hours at 240F
(116C) to final cure the phenolic presize of the backing .
Test Proc~ure I
The coated abrasive article was converted into 7.6 cm by 335 cm endless belt and tested on a constant load surface grinder. A pre-weighed, 4150 mild steel workpiece approximately 2.5 cm by 5 cm by 18 cm was mounted in a holder. The workpiece was positioned 25 vertically, with the 2.5 cm by 18 cm face facing an appro~imately 36 cm diameter 65 Shore A durometer serrated rubber contact wheel with one on one lands over which was entrained the coated abrasive belt. The workpiece was then reciprocated vertically through an 30 18 cm path at the rate of 20 cycles per minute, while a spring loaded plunger urged the workpiece against the belt with a load of 4.5 kg (10 lbs) as the belt was driven at about 2050 meters per minute. After thirty seconds elapsed grinding time, the workpiece holder 35 assembly was removed and re-weighed, the amount of stock removed calculated by subtracting the abraded SlJBST~TlJTE SHE~T (RULE 26) W095/07797 ~ ~ 7 Q ~ ~ ~ PCT~S94/007S4 weight from the original weight, and a new, pre-weighed workpiece and holder were mounted on the equipment.
Additionally, the surface finish (Ra) and, in some cases, the Rtm, of the workpiece was also measured and 5 these procedures will be described below. The test endpoint was when the amount of steel removed in the thirty second interval was less than one third the value of the steel removed in the first thirty seconds of grinding or until the workpiece burned, i.e., became 10 discolored.
Test Proce~ure II
The same procedure as Test Procedure I was used except that a 1018 mild steel workpiece was used.
Test Proc~u~e III
A maple dowel rod that had a diameter of approximately 3 cm was installed on a lathe. The dowel rod was rotated at about 3800 rpm. A strip of abrasive article (1 inch (2.54 cm) wide and 12 inches (30.5 cm) long) was held against the dowel rod without any 20 oscillation for approximately 15 to 20 seconds. After abrading, the dowel rod was stained with a cherry oil stain commercially available from Watco.
Ra is a common measure of roughness used in the abrasives industry. Ra is defined as the arithmetic 25 mean of the departures of the roughness profile from the mean line. Ra was measured with a profilometer probe, which was a diamond tipped stylus. In general, the lower the Ra value was, the smoother or finer the workpiece surface finish. The results were recorded in 30 micrometers. The profilometer used was a Perthen M4P.
Rtm is a common measure of roughness used in the abrasive industry. Rtm is defined as the mean of five individual roughness depths of five successive measuring lengths, where an individual roughness depth 35 is the vertical distance between the highest and lowest points in a measuring length. Rtm is measured the same SlJBST~TUTE SHEET (RU~E 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7098q PCT~S94/00754 as Ra. The results are recorded in micrometers. In general, the lower the Rtm, the smoother the finish.
~x~mpl~8 .
5 Ex~m~l~s 1, lA ~n~ comD~r~tive Ex~mpl~ A, AA
Abrasive articles representative of the invention were compared with conventional coated abrasive articles having uniformly shaped and dimensioned abrasive composites. Example 1 was made according to 10 the ~'General Procedure for Making the Abrasive Article"
describe herein. Comparative Example A was a grade P320 3M 201E Three-M-ite Resin Bond cloth JE-VF coated abrasive commercially available from 3M Company, St.
Paul, MN. These abrasive products were tested 15 according to Test Procedure I and the test results can be found in Table 1. Also, additional Example lA and Comparative Example AA were performed wherein Example 1 and Comparative Example A were repeated, except that Test Procedure II was used in lieu of Test Procedure I.
20 The results also are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1 Run Ex. 1 C.Ex. A Ex. lA C. Ex. AA
Init. Cut 12.2 15.3 13.3 11.8 (grams) Init. Ra 0.86 0.88 0.98 1.18 (~m) Init.Rtm 9.43 10.66 (~m) Total Cut 283.6 156.8 255.5 247.2 (grams) Final Ra(~m) 0.33 0.43 0.37 0.40 Final Rtm 3.11 3.92 (~m) .
SllBSTlTUTE SHE~T (Rl~LE 26) W095/07797 ~ ~ 7 Q 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 The above results show that the abrasive articles of the present invention, as represented by Examples 1 and lA, demonstrated higher cut and provided finer finish than the comparison examples using exclusively 5 identically shaped abrasive composites.
Ex~mple 2 an~ Comparative Example8 B through E
This set of examples compared the abrasive article of the invention with abrasive articles that had only one commonly shaped and dimensioned type of abrasive 10 composite present on the backing. All of these examples were made according to "General Procedure for Making the Abrasive Article," described above, except for the following changes. The abrasive slurry consisted of 20.3 parts TMPTA, 8.7 parts TAT~TC, 1 15 part PH2, 1 part ASF, 1 part SCA, and 69 parts of 40 micrometer WAO. Also, the production tool for Comparative Examples B through E was an embossed polypropylene thermoplastic continuous web that contained five sided pyramidal type cavities (inclusive 20 of the mouth of the cavity as a "base"). The cavities for Comparative Examples B through E were all identical in dimensions and the cavities butted up against one another. The height of the cavities for Comparative Example B was about 178 micrometers, for Comparative 25 Example C was about 63.5 micrometers, for Comparative Example D was about 711 micrometers and Comparative Example E was about 356 micrometers.
Example 2 and Comparative Examples B through E
then were tested according to Test Procedure III above.
The stained maple dowel rod abraded with Comparative Examples B through E showed evidence of grooves visible by the naked eye. In contrast, the stained maple dowel rod abraded with Example 2 representing the present invention showed no evidence of grooves visible by the SUBSTITUTE SHEET (Rl~LE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 Q 9 8 9 PCTtUS94tO0754 naked eye and produced a very fine finish on the wood workpiece.
Various modifications and alterations of this invention will become apparent to those skilled in the 5 art without departing from the scope and spirit of this invention, and it should be understood that this invention is not to be unduly limited to the illustrative embodiments set forth herein.
SllBSTlTUTE SH~ET (Rl)LE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 ~ 9 PCT~S94/00754 ~
Appendix ~*****************************
'**Program : VARI-l.BAS *
*****************************
' VARI-l.BAS - Creates random left and right half angles /
DECLARE SUB showangles () DIM SHARED LEFTANG(3000) AS INTEGER
10 DIM SHARED RIGHTANG(3000) AS INTEGER
'******* Begin Main Program *****
PI = 3.141592654#
RANDOMIZE TIMER
CLS
15 INPUT "WHAT IS THE TOOL ANGLE ", ToolAng INPUT "WHAT IS THE MINIMUM HALF ANGLE ", MinHalfAng INPUT "WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM HALF ANGLE ", MaxHalfAng INPUT "WHAT IS THE MINIMUM INCLUDED ANGLE OF THE
MATERIAL ", M; nTnclAng 20 ANG1 = 45 'ANGl is the previous grooves Right half angle 'ANGl & 2 are used to check the MinInclAng FOR I = 1 TO 2500 STEP 2 '** Calculate Odd Numbered Groove Angles ****
FOR T = 1 TO INT(RND * 100 + 1): NEXT T
'This is a random delay IF MinInclAng - ANG1 > M; n~ 1 fAng THEN
min = MinInclAng - ANG1 ELSE
min = MinHalfAng END IF
LEFTANG(I) = INT(RND * (MaxHalfAng - min + 1)+
min) IF ToolAng - LEFTANG(I) > MinHalfAng THEN
min = ToolAng - LEFTANG(I) ELSE
~UBS~iTUT~ 5HEET (R~LE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 min = M; n~ 1 fAng END IF
RIGHTANG(I) = INT(RND * (MaxHalfAng - (min) + 1) +
(min)) ANG2 = RIGHTANG(I) '** End Calculate Odd Number Groove angles **
'** Begin Calculating Even Numbered Groove angles **
FOR T = 1 TO INT(RND * lOO + 1): NEXT T
'This is a random delay RIGHTANG(I + 1) = INT(RND * (MaxHalfAng - MinHalfAng +
1) + MinHalfAng) IF ToolAng - RIGHTANG(I + 1) > MinHalfAng THEN
min = ToolAng - RIGHTANG(I + 1) min = MinHalfAng END I]F
IF MinInclAng - ANG2 > min THEN
min = MinInclAng - ANG2 min = min END IF
LEFTANG(I + 1) = INT(RND * (MaxHalfAng - (min) 1) +
(min)J
25 ANG1 - RIGHTANG(I + 1) '** End Calculating Even Numbered Groove Angles **
NEXT I
CALL ~howangles 30 OPEN 'IRANANG.TXT'' FOR OUTPUT AS #3 PRINT #3, "RANDOM ANGLE GENERATOR"
PRINT #3, "LEFT ANG RIGHT ANG"
FOR I = 1 TO 2SOO
PRINT #3, LEFTANG(I); RIGHTANG(I) SUB~TlTlJTE SHEET (RULE 26) -W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/007S4 '****************** End Main Program*************
5 SUB showangles 'This subroutine shows the first 30 grooves CLS
PI 3.141592654#
FOR I = 1 TO 30 'LOCATE 1, 1: PRINT LEFTANG(I), RIGHTANG(I), 15 LEFTANG(I) + RIGHTANG(I) A = (TAN(LEFTANG(I) * PI / 180) * 200) LINE (200, 100)-(200 - A, 300), 3 B = (TAN(RIGHTANG(I) * PI / 180) * 200) LINE (200, 100)-(200 + B, 300), 3 FOR T = 1 TO 200000: NEXT T
LINE (200, 100)-(200 - A, 300), 0 LINE (200, 100)-(200 + B, 300), 0 NEXT I
END SUB
,*****************************
'** Program : VARISTAT.BAS *
30 *****************************
DECLARE SUB SETGRAPH2 () 'Graph for Included Angles DECLARE SUB ANGLEGEN () 'Main Subroutine DECLARE SUB XGEN () 'Subroutine for Tests 35 only DECLARE SUB SETGRAPH () 'Graph for Half Angles SUBSTiTlJT~ SI~EET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 DIM 5HARED ANGLEFT(2501) AS INTEGER 'Array for left half angles Direction l DIM SHARED ANGRIGHT(2501) AS INTEGER 'Array for right half angles Direction l 5 DIM SHARED ANGLEFT2(2501) AS INTEGER 'Array for left half angles Direction 2 DIM SHARED ANGRIGHT2(2501) AS INTEGER 'Array for right half angles Direction 2 DIM S~ARED HALF(8 TO 45) AS l~ ~ 'Array to tally 10 number of angles between 8 and 45 Direction l DIM SHARED HALF2(8 TO 45) AS I~ K 'Array to tally number of angles between 8 and 45 Direction 2 DIM SIIARED ACCUM(O TO 100) AS INTEGER 'Array to tally number of included angles between 40 and 90 Dir 15 DIM SHARED ACCUM2(0 TO 100) AS INTEGER 'Array to tally number of included angles between 40 and 90 Dir CLS
CALL ANGLEGEN
'CALL XGEN 'This was for test purposes only SUB ANGLEGEN
CALL SETGRAPH
OPEN '~RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #3 'Two different .TXT files would have been created, 25 however here we use the same file OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #4 INPUT #3, A$
INPUT #3, B$
INPUT #4, A$
30 INPUT #4, B$
FOR I = l TO 2500 INPUT #3, ANGLEFT(I) INPUT #3, ANGRIGHT(I) INPUT #4, ANGLEFT2(I) INPUT #4, ANGRIGHT2(I) NEXT
E SH~E~ (R~LE 26) WO 95/07797 2 i 7 ~ 9 ~ 9 PCT/US94/00754 CLOSE 3, 4 FOR I = 1 TO 2500 HALF(ANGLEFT(I)) = HALF(ANGLEFT(I)) + 1 HALF2(ANGRIGHT(I)) = HALF2(ANGRIGHT(I)) +
NEXT I
LOCATE 2, 10: COLOR 11 PRINT "First Direction Total Left Half Angle"
10 LOCATE 3, 10: COLOR 12 PRINT "First Direction Total Right Half Angle"
FOR I = 8 TO 45 LINE (I, O)--(I, HALF(I)), 11 15 LINE (I + .5, 0)--(I + .5, HALF2(I)), 12 HALF(I) = 0 HALF2(I) = 0 NEXT I
SLEEP
CALL SETGRAPH
LOCATE 2, 10: COLOR 11 PRINT "Second Direction Total Left Half Angle"
LOCATE 3, 10: COLOR 12 25 PRINT "Second Direction Total Right Half Angle"
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 HALF(ANGLEFT2(I)) = HALF(ANGLEFT2(I)) +
HALF2(ANGRIGHT2(I)) = HALF2(ANGRIGHT2(I)) + 1 FOR I = 8 TO 45 LINE (I, O)-(I, HALF(I)), 11 HALF(I) = 0 35 LINE (I + .5, 0)-(I + .5, HALF2(I)), 12 HALF2(I) = 0 ~UB~TlTll~C SHEET (RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 ~ 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 NEXT I
SLEEP
5 LOCATE 2, 10: COLOR 11 PRINT "First Direction Total Included Angles (Left +
Right Half Angle)"
LOCATE 3, 10: COLOR 12 PRINT "Second Direction Total Included Angles (Left +
10 Right Half Angle)"
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 ACCUM(ANGLEFT(I) + ANGRIGHT(I)) = ACCUM(ANGLEFT(I) +
ANGRIGHT(I)) + 1 ACCUM2(ANGLEFT2(I) + ANGRIGHT2(I)) =
ACCUM2(ANGLEFT2(I) + ANGRIGHT2(I)) + 1 NEXT I
FOR I = 40 TO 90 LINE (I, 0)-(I, ACCUM(I)), 11 ACCUM(I) = 0 LINE (I + .5, 0)-(I + .5, ACCUM2(I)), 12 ACCUM2(I) = 0 NEXT I
SLEEP
SUB SETGRAPH
30 WINDOW (4, -30)-(50, 200) CLS
LINE (6, 0)-(6, 200), 3 LINE (6, 0)-(50, 0), 3 35 LINE (6, 195)-(50, 195), 3 LINE (6, 105)-(50, 105), 3 SU~STlTllTE S~EET (RlJLE 26~
WO 95/07797 2 1 7 D 9 8 ~ PCT/US94/00754 ~
LINE (6, 50)--(50, 50), 3 LINE (6, 150)-(50, 150), 3 LOCATE 23, 7: PRINT "8"
LOCATE 23, 72: PRINT "45"
5 LOCATE 23, 40: PRINT "27"
LOCATE 22, 3: PRINT "1"
LOCATE 1, 1: PRINT "200"
LOCATE 11, 1: PRINT "100", END SUB
WINDOW (37, -30)-(95, 200) CLS
LINE (39, 0)-(39, 200), 3 LINE (39, 0)--(95, 0), 3 LINE (39, 198)--(95, 198), 3 LINE (39, 102)--(95, 102), 3 20 LINE (39, 50)--(95, 50), 3 LINE (39, 150)--(95, 150), 3 LOCATE 23, 4: PRINT "40"
LOCATE 23, 73: PRINT "90"
LOCATE 23, 39: PRINT "65"
25 LOCATE 22, 3: PRINT "1"
LOCATE 1, 1: PRINT "200"
LOCATE 11, 1: PRINT "100"
END SUB
30 SUB XGEN 'This subroutine was for test purposes only CALL SETGRAPH
OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #3 INPUT #3, A$
35 INPUT #3, B$
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 ~U~STI~IJTE ~HEET ~RULE 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 ~ ~ 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 INPUT #3, ANGLEFT(I) INPUT #3, ANGRIGHT(I) NEXT I
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 HALF(ANGLEFT(I)) = HALF(ANGLEFT(I)) + 1 NEXT I
FOR I = 8 TO 45 LINE (I, 0) (I, HALF(I)), 11 HALF(I) = 0 NEXT I
SLEEP
CALL SETGRAPH
15 FOR I = 1 TO 2500 HALF(ANGRIGHT(I)) = HALF(ANGRIGHT(I)) + 1 NEXT I
FOR I = 8 TO 45 LINE (I, 0)-(I, HALF(I)), 11 HALF(I) = 0 NEXT I
SLEEP
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 ACCUM(ANGLEFT(I) + ANGRIGHT(I)) = ACCUM(ANGLEFT(I) +
ANGRIGHT(I)) + 1 NEXT I
FOR I = 40 TO 90 LINE (I, 0)-(I, ACCUM(I)), 11 ACCUM(I) = O
NEXT X
SLEEP
END SIJB
SllBSTlTUTE SHEFr (R~LE 26) WO95/07797 2 1 7 Q 9 ~ ~ PCT~S94/007S4 ~
*****************************
'** Program : TOPVIEW.BAS *
*****************************
'* In general it takes the random angle data file, 5 calculates where the valleys and peaks are, draws black straight lines for the valleys, then connects the peaks across the diagonal. Then it displays the output on the screen or an HP 7475 plotter. *
******************************
10 DECLARE SUB PLOTPEAKS () DECLARE SUB PLOTDOTS () DECLARE SUB LINES () DECLARE SUB DIAGONAL () DIM SHARED ML(2500) AS INTEGER
15 DIM SHARED MR(2500) AS Ih~l~
DIM SHARED NL(2500) AS INTEGER
DIM SHARED NR(2500) AS lN'l'~
DIM SHARED M(5000) AS DOUBLE
20 DIM SHARED N(5000) AS DOUBLE
COMMON SHARED PI, X, GROOVES
PI = 3.141592654#
GROOVES = 1000 25 OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #2 OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #3 INPUT "ENTER IN THE SQUARE SIZE YOU WOULD LIKE (.2 ->
1.5 INCHES) ", X
30 INPUT #2, A$
INPUT #2, B$
FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES
INPUT #2, ML(I) INPUT #2, MR(I) . .
~l~BST~TE ~HE~T (P~ E 26) ~ W095/07797 ~ t 7~ PCT~S~J~754 INPUT #3, A$
INPUT #3, B$
FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES
INPUT #3, NL(I) INPUT #3, NR(I) NEXT I
FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES
M(I * 2 - 1) = M((I - 1) * 2) + TAN(ML(I) * PI / 180) * . 01~
M(I * 2) = M(I * 2 - 1) + TAN(MR(I) * PI / 180) *
.014 N(I * 2 - 1) = N((I - 1) * 2) + TAN(NL(I) * PI / 180) 15 * .014 N(I * 2) = N(I * 2 - 1) + TAN(NR(I) * PI / 180) *
.014 NEXT I
20 LOCATE 15, 15 INPUT "Would you like to see the data on the (S)creen or (P)lotter", ans$
ans$ = UCASE$(ans$) 25 IF ans$ = "S" THEN
SCREEN g WINDOW SCREEN (-(X / 10), -(X / 10))-(X, (X + X /
10) * (.75 - .75 * .138)) PAINT (X / 2, X / 2), 15 CALL LINES
SLEEP
CLS
PAINT (X / 2, X / 2), 15 CALL DIAGONAL
SUBSTlT(3T~ SH~ U~ 26~
W095107797 2 ~ 7Q~8~ PCT~S94/007S4 ~
END IF
IF ans$ = "P" THEN
CALL PLOTDOTS
CALL PLOTPEAKS
SLEEP
END IF
SUB DIAGONAL
10 FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES * 2 STEP 2 'LINE (M(I), N(l))-(M(I), 10) 'LINE (M(l), N(I))-(10, N(I)) NEXT I
15 FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 LINE (M(I), -.014)-(M(I + 1), O) LINE (M(I + 1), 0)-(M(I + 2), -.014) NEXT I
20 LINE (M(l), -.014)-(M(l), -.02) LINE -(M(GROOVES * 2 - 2), -.02) LINE -(M(GROOVES * 2 - 2), -.014) FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 LINE (-.014, N(I))-(0, N(I + 1)) 25 LINE (0, N(I + 1))-(-.014, N(I + 2)) NEXT I
LINE (--014, N(1))-(-.02, N(l)) LINE -(-.02, N(GROOVES * 2 - 2)) LINE -(-.014, N(GROOVES * 2 - 2)) FOR NN = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 FOR MM = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 1), N(NN ~ 1)), 2, 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 1), N(NN - 1)), 4 ~LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM - 1), N(NN + 1))~ 4 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM - 1), N(NN - 1)), 2 SlJ~STITlJT~ SHEET (R~LE 26) ~ WO95/07797 2 ~ 7 0 ~ ~ 9 PCT~S94100754 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 2), N(NN + 2)), 2 'LINE (M(MM), N(NN))-(M(MM + 2), N(NN - 2)), 4 PSET (M(MM), N(NN)), 4 IF M(MM - 1) > X THEN GOTO STOPMM
IF N(NN - 1) > (X + X / 10) * (.75 - .75 * .138) THEN GOTO STOPNN
NEXT MM
STOPMM:
NEXT NN
'PAINT (M(5) + (M(6) - M(5)) / 2, N(6) - (N(6) - N(5)) / 2), 11 'CIRCLE (M(5) + (M(6) - M(5)) / 2, N(6) - (N(6) - N(5)) / 2), .001, 11 STOPNN:
END SUB
SUB LINES
FOR I = 1 TO 200 STEP 2 LINE (M(I), N(l))-(M(I), 10) LINE (M(l), N(I))-(10, N(I)) NEXT I
FOR I = 1 TO 198 STEP 2 LINE (M(I), -.014)-(M(I + 1), 0) LINE (M(I + 1), 0)-(M(I + 2), -.014) NEXT I
LINE (M(l), -.014)-(M(l), -.02) LINE -(M(198), -.02) 30 LINE -(M(198), -.014) FOR I = 1 TO 198 STEP 2 LINE (-.014, N(I))-(O, N(I + 1)) LINE (0, N(I + 1))-(-.014, N(I + 2)) NEXT I
35 LINE (-.014, N(l))-(-.02, N(l)) LINE -(-.02, N(198)) SUBST~TUTE SH~ (RULE 26) WO 95/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 ~ PCT/US94/007S4 ~
LINE --(--.014, N(198)) FOR NN = 2 TO 198 STEP 2 FOR MM = 2 TO 198 STEP 2 5 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))--(M(MM + 1), N(NN + 1)), 2 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))--(M(MM+ 1), N(NN -- 1)), 4 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))--(M(MM -- 1), N(NN + 1)), 4 LINE (M(MM), N(NN))--(M(MM -- 1), N(NN -- 1)), 2 IF M(MM -- 1) > X THEN GOTO 300 IF N(NN -- 1) > (X + X / 10) * (.75 -- .75 * .138) NEXT MM
NEXT NN
15 'PAINT (M(5) + (M(6) -- M(5)) / 2, N(6) -- (N(6) -- N(5)) / 2), 11 'CIRCLE (M(5) + (M(6) - M(5)) / 2, N(6) - (N(6) - N(5)) 2), .001, 11 END SUB
SUB PLOTDOTS
'WINDOW SCREEN (-(X / 10), -(X / 10))-(X, (X + X / 10) 25 * (.75 - .75 * .138)) OPEN I'COMl:9600,S,7,1,RS,CS65535,DS,CD'' FOR RANDOM AS
#4 'PRINT #4, USING "IP;
30 SC##.
(X); (- (X / 10) ); ( (X + X / 10 'PRINT #4, USING "IP250,596,7470,7796;
SC##.
35 PRINT #4, "VS30;"
PRINT #4, "SPl;"
SllBSTITlJTE SHE~T (RULE 26~
~ WO 95/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 ~ PCT~S94/007S4 FOR I = 1 TO GROOVES * 2 STEP 2 'LINE (M(I), N(l))-(M(I)~ 10) 'LINE (M(l), N(I))-(10, N(I)) NEXT I
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
FOR I = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 'LINE (M(I), -.014)-(M(I + 1), 0) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
'LINE (M(l), -.014)-(M(l), -.02) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
'LINE (-.014, N(l))-(-.02, N(l)) 35 PRINT #4, USING "PA -.03,##.
PRINT #4, USING "PA -.03,##.
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
COUNT) N (A + COUNT) IF M(B + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 400 IF N(A + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 400 NEXT COUNT
PRINT #4, "PU;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
(A) PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
COUNT); N(A + COUNT) IF M(B + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 401 IF N(A + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 401 NEXT COUNT
PRINT #4, "PU;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
BEEP
END SUB
SUB PLOTPEAKS
OPEN "COMl:9600,S,7,1,RS,CS65535,DS,CD" FOR RANDOM AS
10 #4 PRINT #4, "IN;IP250,596,7443,7796; SCO,1,0,1;"
PRINT #4, "VS50;"
15 PRINT #4, "SPl;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
20 FOR I = 2 TO GROOVES * 2 - 2 STEP 2 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
IF N(I + 1) > X THEN GOTO 1700 NEXT I
5 PRINT #4, USING "PA -.03,##.
##.
N(l); M(I); N(Q) PRINT #4, USING "PA
##.
15 2); N(Q); M(I + 2); N(l) NEXT I
FOR I = 1 TO Q STEP 4 PRINT #4, USING "PA
20 ##.
N(I); M(P); N(I) PRINT #4, USING "PA
##.
N(I + 2); M(l); N(I + 2) PRINT #4, "SP4;VS20;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
COUNT); N(A + COUNT) IF M(B + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 1400 IF N(A + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 1400 SUBST5~lJT~ SHE~T (R~ 26) ~ W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94100754 NEXT COUNT
PRINT #4, "PU;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
PRINT #4, "PU;"
IF B - 2 <= 0 THEN GOTO 2000 20 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
PRINT #4, "SP4;"
25 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
30 COUNT); N(A + COUNT) IF M(B + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 1401 IF N(A + COUNT - 1) > X THEN GOTO 1401 NEXT COUNT
35 PRINT #4, "PU;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
PRINT #4, "SP3;"
PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
FOR A = 3 TO Q STEP 2 FOR COUNT = O TO Q - 1 STEP 1 PRINT #4, USING l'PD;PA ##.
PRINT #4, "PU;"
15 PRINT #4, USING "PA ##.
BEEP
,*****************************
'** Program : MAKETAPE.BAS *
,*****************************
'MAKETAPE.BAS
' 1) Ask for the real tool angle 30 ' 2) Read in all Left and Right angles 3) Figure out how many grooves it will take to make a 22.5 inch wide pattern ' 4) Write the Code ' SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26) ~ W095/077~7 2 1 7 0 9 ~ ~ PCT~S94100754 DECLARE SUB STOPFANUK () ' Code to shut down DTM
DECLARE SUB STARTFANUK () ' Code to start up DTM
DECLARE SUB XthenLEFT (A!) ' Code generation for: X
move then Left angle plunge 5 DECL~RE SUB ROTATEthenRIGHT (A!) ' Code generation for:
Rotate C then Right angle plunge DECL~RE SUB XthenRIGHT (A!) ' Code generation for: X
move then Right angle plunge DECLARE SUB ROTATEthenLEFT (A!) ' Code generation for:
10 Rotate C then Left angle plunge '* LEFT() - array to store the left angle information '* RIGHT() - array to store the right angle information '* xr~ovE() - array to store the X distance between 15 grooves DIM SHARED LEFT(2500) AS INTEGER, RIGHT(2500) AS
DIM SHARED XMOVE(2500) AS DOUBLE
20 COMMON SHARED TOOLANG AS DOUBLE, CABS AS DOUBLE, XPOS
AS DOUBLE
'******** BEGIN MAIN PROGRAM *********
PI = 3.141592654#
CLS
LOCATE 5, 5 INPUT "WHAT IS THE REAL TOOL ANGLE ", TOOLANG
INPUT "WHAT IS THE PEAK HEIGHT ", Height OPEN "RANANG.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #3 'Opens data file of angles INPUT #3, A$
INPUT #3, B$
SUBST~TUT~ S~ET (RULE 26) W095/07797 2 1 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S9~ 7~4 ~
FOR I = 1 TO 2500 'Reads all Left and Right angles from data file INPUT #3, LEFT(I) INPUT #3, RIGHT(I) XMOVE(l) = TAN(LEFT(l) * PI / 180) * Height ' This 10 formula calculates the horizontal movement for the first groove XPOS = XP0S + XMOVE(l) FOR I = 2 TO 2500 XMOVE(I) = TAN(RIGHT(I - 1) * PI / 180) *
Height + TAN(LEFT(I) * PI / 180) * Height ' This formula calculates the horizontal movement XPOS = XPOS + XMOVE(I) P = I
' P is the number of grooves IF XPOS > 22.5 THEN GOTO 100 ' Checks to make sure our pattern width is < 22.5 NEXT I
LOCATE 10, 10: PRINT USING "GROOVES =
XPOS = O
30 OPEN "FANUK.TXT" FOR OUTPUT AS #3 PRINT "WRITING TO FILE"
CALL STARTFANUK '* This Block of code Generates the CNC file to run the FANUK controller 35 FOR I = 1 TO P STEP 2 '*
CALL XthenLEFT(I) '*
SUBS~TUTE SHEE~ (RU~E 26) W095/07797 ~ 7 7 0 9 8 9 PCT~S94/00754 CALL ROTATEthenRIGHT(I) ~*
CA:LL XthenRIGHT(I + 1) '*
CA:LL ROTATEthenLEFT(I + 1) '*
NEXT I '*
5 CALL STOPFANUK '*
PRINT "DONE"
'********** END MAIN PROGRAM ***************
'***~*The information below describes the two subroutines of the CNC code ******
'THE SUBROUTINES 0171 & 0172 ARE AS FOLLOWS
'0171;
'G91 G01 Y 0.00200 F 1.0;
'G91 G01 Y 0.01587 F 0.03;
'G91 G01 Y 0.00013 F 0.005;
'G04P245;
'G91 G01 -0.013 F l.O;
'M99;
' ;
'0172;
'G91 G01 Y 0.01287 F 0.03;
'G91 G01 Y 0.00013 F 0.005;
'G04P245;
'G91 G01 Y -0.018 F l.O;
'M99;
' ;
SUB ROTATEthenLEFT (A) 35 CABS = -1 * (LEFT(A) + 90) + TOOLANG
PRINT #3, USING "GOl G90 C ##.
~JBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26~
W095/07797 2 1 7 0 q 8 9 PCTtUS94/00754 ~
PRINT #3, "M98 P172 Ll;"
END SUB
5 SUB ROTATEthenRIGHT,(A) CABS = -1 * (90 - RIGHT(A)) PRINT #3, USING "GOl G90 C ##.
PRINT #3, "M98 P172 Ll;"
END SUB
SUB STARTFANUK
15 PRINT #3, ";"
PRINT #3, "G94 G20 G61;"
END SUB
PRINT #3, "M54;"
PRINT #3, "M50;"
PRINT #3, "M58;"
25 PRINT #3, "M59;"
PRINT #3, "M51;"
PRINT #3, "M02;"
PRINT #3, IlMOO;~
PRINT #3, '';
END SUB
SUB XthenLEFT (A) 35 PRINT #3, USING "GOO G91 X ##.
~ 1 7 n n n ~ PCT~S94/00754 WO 95/07797 ~ I / U ~ ~ 7 .
CABS = -1 * (LEFT(A) + 90) + TOOLANG
PRINT #3, USING "GOl G90 C
PRINT #3, "M98 P171 Ll;"
SUB XthenRIGHT (A) PRINT #3, USING "GOO G91 X ##.
PRINT #3, "M98 P171 Ll;"
END SUB
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (Rl~LE 26) -
Claims (18)
1. An abrasive article (10) comprising a sheet-like structure having a major surface (16) having deployed in fixed position thereon first and second three-dimensional abrasive composites (12), each of said composites (12) comprising abrasive particles (13) dispersed in a binder (14) and having a substantially precise shape defined by a substantially distinct and discernible boundary (15) which includes substantially 0 specific dimensions, wherein said first abrasive composite has a first precise shape having specific first dimensions and said second abrasive composite has a second precise shape having second specific dimensions, wherein each of said abrasive composites has a boundary defined by at least four planar surfaces wherein adjacent planar surfaces of one composite meet at an edge to define an angle of intersection therebetwee, wherein at least one angle of intersection of said first abrasive composite is different from all of the angles of intersection of said second composite.
2. The abrasive article of claim 1, wherein substantially all of said abrasive composites exist as pairs, each pair including two unmatched abrasive composites, one abrasive composite having a nonidentical shape to an adjacent abrasive composite.
3. The abrasive article of claim 1 or 2, wherein said first and second abrasive composites each has a boundary defined by at least four planar surfaces wherein adjacent planar surfaces meet to define an edge of a certain length, wherein at least one edge of said first composite has a length which is different from the length of all edges of the second composite.
4. The abrasive article of claim 3, wherein the length of said at least one edge of said first composite has a length which varies with respect to the length of any edge of said second composite in a ratio between 10:1 to 1:10, not inclusive of 1:1.
5. The abrasive article of any of claims 1 to 4, wherein said first and second abrasive composites have a first and second geometrical shape, respectively, which are nonidentical.
6. The abrasive article of claim 5, wherein said first and second geometrical shapes are selected from the group of geometrical shapes consisting of cubic, prismatic, pyramidal, and truncated pyramidal.
7. The abrasive article of any of clalms 1 to 6, wherein no angle of intersection of adjacent planar surfaces in said first abrasive composite is equal to 0° or 90°.
8. The abrasive article of any of claims 1 to 7, wherein substantially all said abrasive composites have a pyramidal shape.
9. The abrasive article of claim 1, wherein said surface has a machine direction and opposite side edges, each side edge being parallel to the machine direction axis and each side edge being respectively within a first and second imaginary plane each of which is perpendicular to said surface, a plurality of parallel elongate abrasive ridges deployed in fixed position on said surface, each ridge having a longitudinal axis located at its transverse center and extending along an imaginary line which intersects said first and second planes at an angle which is neither 0 nor 90, and wherein each said abrasive ridge comprises a plurality of said three-dimensional abrasive composites which are intermittently spaced along said longitudinal axis.
10. The abrasive article of claim 9, wherein said plurality of parallel elongate abrasive ridges are deployed in first and second groups wherein said first and second groups are located at nonoverlapping locations in said machine direction or in a direction perpendicular to said machine direction of said major surface, wherein said longitudinal axis of at least one abrasive ridge within said first group extends along an imaginary line that intersects with an imaginary line extending from at least one longitudinal axis of an abrasive ridge in said second group.
11. The abrasive article of claim 9, wherein each abrasive ridge has a distal end spaced from said surface and each distal end extends to a third imaginary plane which is spaced from and parallel to said surface.
12. The abrasive article of claim 1, wherein each said abrasive composite has a distal end which is spaced from said surface a distance of about 50 micrometers to about 1020 micrometers.
13. The abrasive article of claim 1, wherein said abrasive composites are fixed on said major surface in a density of about 100 to about 10,000 abrasive composites/cm2.
14. The abrasive article of claim 1, wherein said surface has a surface area, and substantially all said surface area is covered by said abrasive composites.
15. A method for manufacturing an abrasive article according to claim 1, comprising the steps of:
(a) preparing an abrasive slurry wherein the abrasive slurry comprises a plurality of abrasive particles dispersed in a binder precursor;
(b) providing a backing (41) having a front surface and a back surface; and a production tool (46) provided with a plurality of cavities in at least one major surface thereof, each cavity having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernible boundary which includes specific dimensions, wherein said precise cavity shapes are not all identical;
(c) providing a means (44) to apply said abrasive slurry into a plurality of said cavities of said production tool (46);
(d) contacting said front surface of said backing with said production tool such that the abrasive slurry wets said front surface;
(e) solidifying the binder precursor to form a binder, whereupon solidification the abrasive slurry is converted into a plurality of abrasive composites; and (f) separating said production tool from said backing after said solidifying to provide a plurality of abrasive composites as attached to said backing each having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernable boundary which include specific dimensions, wherein said precise abrasive composite shapes are not all identical.
(a) preparing an abrasive slurry wherein the abrasive slurry comprises a plurality of abrasive particles dispersed in a binder precursor;
(b) providing a backing (41) having a front surface and a back surface; and a production tool (46) provided with a plurality of cavities in at least one major surface thereof, each cavity having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernible boundary which includes specific dimensions, wherein said precise cavity shapes are not all identical;
(c) providing a means (44) to apply said abrasive slurry into a plurality of said cavities of said production tool (46);
(d) contacting said front surface of said backing with said production tool such that the abrasive slurry wets said front surface;
(e) solidifying the binder precursor to form a binder, whereupon solidification the abrasive slurry is converted into a plurality of abrasive composites; and (f) separating said production tool from said backing after said solidifying to provide a plurality of abrasive composites as attached to said backing each having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernable boundary which include specific dimensions, wherein said precise abrasive composite shapes are not all identical.
16. A method of refining a workpiece with the abrasive article according to claim 1, comprising the steps of:
(a) bringing into frictional contact a workpiece surface and said abrasive article; and (b) moving at least one of said abrasive article or said workpiece surface relative to the other such that the surface finish of said workpiece surface is reduced.
(a) bringing into frictional contact a workpiece surface and said abrasive article; and (b) moving at least one of said abrasive article or said workpiece surface relative to the other such that the surface finish of said workpiece surface is reduced.
17. A production tool for manufacture of the abrasive composites according to claim 1, comprising a sheet-like structure having a plurality of cavities formed on a major surface thereof, each cavity having a precise shape defined by a distinct and discernible boundary which includes specific dimensions, wherein said precise cavity shapes are not all identical.
18. A method for making a master that is used to form a production tool according to claim 17, said master having a major surface extending within a first imaginary plane, comprising the steps of:
(1) determining angles corresponding to facing right and left planar surfaces of adjacent three-dimensional shapes and wherein each of said angles has a value as measured between its planar surface and a plane which extends in a normal direction to said master surface and contains an edge of said planar surface in contact with said surface, by the following substeps:
(i) selecting an angle value between, but not including, 0° and 90° to establish a first right half angle of a first right planar surface of a first right-side three-dimensional shape with a random number generating means capable of randomly selecting an angle value between, but not including, o° and 90°;
(ii) selecting an angle value between, but not including, 0° and 90° with said random number generating means to establish a first left half angle for a first left planar surface of a first left-side three-dimensional shape facing said first right planar surface of said first right-side three-dimensional shape;
(iii) proceeding along a first direction extending linearly within said first imaginary plane to a second left planar surface of a second left-side three dimensional shape located adjacent said first left-side three-dimensional shape and using said random number generating means to select a value between, but not including, 0° and 90° to establish a second left planar angle for said second left planar surface;
(iv) using said random number generating means to select a value between, but not including, 0° and 90° for a second right planar surface of a second right-side three-dimensional shape facing said second left planar surface;
(v) proceeding along said first direction to a third right-side three-dimensional shape located adjacent said second right-side three-dimensional shape;
(vi) repeating said substeps (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), and (v), in that sequence, at least once;
(2) repeating step (1) except that the angles are determined for left and right planar surfaces of adjacent three-dimensional shapes deployed in two adjacent rows in a second direction extending linearly within said first imaginary plane, wherein said first and second directions intersect;
(3) using means to determine, for a given width of said surface of said master, locations of grooves required to be cut by a cutting means to form a series of intersecting grooves defining a plurality of precise three-dimensional shapes having said angles calculated by steps (1) and (2); and (4) providing a cutting means to cut grooves in said surface of said master in correspondence to said angles calculated by steps (1) and (2) and said groove locations determined by step (3) to form a series of intersecting grooves which define a plurality of precise three-dimensional shapes upraised from said surface, each of said precise shapes being defined by a distinct and discernible boundary including specific dimensions, wherein not all said three-dimensional shapes are identical; and, optionally, (5) applying a molten solidifiable polymeric resin on said surface of said master in a manner effective to flow into and conform to said three-dimensional shapes;
(6) solidifying said polymeric resin into a sheet-form; and (7) removing said sheet-form polymeric resin from said surface of said master to form said production tool.
(1) determining angles corresponding to facing right and left planar surfaces of adjacent three-dimensional shapes and wherein each of said angles has a value as measured between its planar surface and a plane which extends in a normal direction to said master surface and contains an edge of said planar surface in contact with said surface, by the following substeps:
(i) selecting an angle value between, but not including, 0° and 90° to establish a first right half angle of a first right planar surface of a first right-side three-dimensional shape with a random number generating means capable of randomly selecting an angle value between, but not including, o° and 90°;
(ii) selecting an angle value between, but not including, 0° and 90° with said random number generating means to establish a first left half angle for a first left planar surface of a first left-side three-dimensional shape facing said first right planar surface of said first right-side three-dimensional shape;
(iii) proceeding along a first direction extending linearly within said first imaginary plane to a second left planar surface of a second left-side three dimensional shape located adjacent said first left-side three-dimensional shape and using said random number generating means to select a value between, but not including, 0° and 90° to establish a second left planar angle for said second left planar surface;
(iv) using said random number generating means to select a value between, but not including, 0° and 90° for a second right planar surface of a second right-side three-dimensional shape facing said second left planar surface;
(v) proceeding along said first direction to a third right-side three-dimensional shape located adjacent said second right-side three-dimensional shape;
(vi) repeating said substeps (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), and (v), in that sequence, at least once;
(2) repeating step (1) except that the angles are determined for left and right planar surfaces of adjacent three-dimensional shapes deployed in two adjacent rows in a second direction extending linearly within said first imaginary plane, wherein said first and second directions intersect;
(3) using means to determine, for a given width of said surface of said master, locations of grooves required to be cut by a cutting means to form a series of intersecting grooves defining a plurality of precise three-dimensional shapes having said angles calculated by steps (1) and (2); and (4) providing a cutting means to cut grooves in said surface of said master in correspondence to said angles calculated by steps (1) and (2) and said groove locations determined by step (3) to form a series of intersecting grooves which define a plurality of precise three-dimensional shapes upraised from said surface, each of said precise shapes being defined by a distinct and discernible boundary including specific dimensions, wherein not all said three-dimensional shapes are identical; and, optionally, (5) applying a molten solidifiable polymeric resin on said surface of said master in a manner effective to flow into and conform to said three-dimensional shapes;
(6) solidifying said polymeric resin into a sheet-form; and (7) removing said sheet-form polymeric resin from said surface of said master to form said production tool.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US12030093A | 1993-09-13 | 1993-09-13 | |
US08/120,300 | 1993-09-13 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA2170989A1 true CA2170989A1 (en) | 1995-03-23 |
Family
ID=22389438
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA 2170989 Abandoned CA2170989A1 (en) | 1993-09-13 | 1994-01-21 | Abrasive article, method of manufacture of same, method of using same for finishing, and a production tool |
Country Status (16)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (5) | US5672097A (en) |
EP (1) | EP0720520B1 (en) |
JP (2) | JP3587209B2 (en) |
KR (1) | KR100313263B1 (en) |
CN (1) | CN1067315C (en) |
AT (1) | ATE182502T1 (en) |
AU (1) | AU679968B2 (en) |
BR (1) | BR9407536A (en) |
CA (1) | CA2170989A1 (en) |
DE (1) | DE69419764T2 (en) |
ES (1) | ES2134930T3 (en) |
NO (1) | NO961011L (en) |
RU (1) | RU2124978C1 (en) |
SG (1) | SG64333A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO1995007797A1 (en) |
ZA (1) | ZA94585B (en) |
Families Citing this family (352)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US6258137B1 (en) * | 1992-02-05 | 2001-07-10 | Saint-Gobain Industrial Ceramics, Inc. | CMP products |
SG64333A1 (en) | 1993-09-13 | 1999-04-27 | Minnesota Mining & Mfg | Abrasive article method of manufacture of same method of using same for finishing and a production tool |
CA2134156A1 (en) * | 1993-11-22 | 1995-05-23 | Thomas P. Klun | Coatable compositions, abrasive articles made therefrom, and methods of making and using same |
CA2212359A1 (en) * | 1995-03-02 | 1996-09-06 | Michihiro Ohishi | Method of texturing a substrate using a structured abrasive article |
WO1997006926A1 (en) | 1995-08-11 | 1997-02-27 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Method of making a coated abrasive article having multiple abrasive natures |
US5975987A (en) * | 1995-10-05 | 1999-11-02 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method and apparatus for knurling a workpiece, method of molding an article with such workpiece, and such molded article |
US5700302A (en) * | 1996-03-15 | 1997-12-23 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Radiation curable abrasive article with tie coat and method |
AU6593796A (en) * | 1996-07-23 | 1998-02-10 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Structured abrasive article containing hollow spherical filler |
US6080215A (en) * | 1996-08-12 | 2000-06-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article and method of making such article |
US5893935A (en) * | 1997-01-09 | 1999-04-13 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Method for making abrasive grain using impregnation, and abrasive articles |
US5876268A (en) * | 1997-01-03 | 1999-03-02 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Method and article for the production of optical quality surfaces on glass |
US6120352A (en) * | 1997-03-06 | 2000-09-19 | Keltech Engineering | Lapping apparatus and lapping method using abrasive sheets |
US6149506A (en) * | 1998-10-07 | 2000-11-21 | Keltech Engineering | Lapping apparatus and method for high speed lapping with a rotatable abrasive platen |
US6231629B1 (en) | 1997-03-07 | 2001-05-15 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article for providing a clear surface finish on glass |
US5888119A (en) * | 1997-03-07 | 1999-03-30 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Method for providing a clear surface finish on glass |
US5910471A (en) * | 1997-03-07 | 1999-06-08 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive article for providing a clear surface finish on glass |
US6224465B1 (en) | 1997-06-26 | 2001-05-01 | Stuart L. Meyer | Methods and apparatus for chemical mechanical planarization using a microreplicated surface |
US5876470A (en) * | 1997-08-01 | 1999-03-02 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive articles comprising a blend of abrasive particles |
US6258311B1 (en) * | 1997-08-25 | 2001-07-10 | Velcro Industries B.V. | Forming mold cavities |
CN1190301C (en) | 1997-08-25 | 2005-02-23 | 维尔克鲁工业公司 | Forming mold cavities |
US5946991A (en) | 1997-09-03 | 1999-09-07 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method for knurling a workpiece |
US6121143A (en) * | 1997-09-19 | 2000-09-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive articles comprising a fluorochemical agent for wafer surface modification |
US5928394A (en) * | 1997-10-30 | 1999-07-27 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Durable abrasive articles with thick abrasive coatings |
US6102777A (en) * | 1998-03-06 | 2000-08-15 | Keltech Engineering | Lapping apparatus and method for high speed lapping with a rotatable abrasive platen |
US6136008A (en) * | 1998-03-19 | 2000-10-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Skin abrader for biomedical electrode |
JPH11300829A (en) * | 1998-04-22 | 1999-11-02 | Toyota Motor Corp | Production of metal film having embossed pattern |
US6053956A (en) * | 1998-05-19 | 2000-04-25 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method for making abrasive grain using impregnation and abrasive articles |
US6589105B2 (en) * | 1998-12-01 | 2003-07-08 | Nutool, Inc. | Pad tensioning method and system in a bi-directional linear polisher |
US6468139B1 (en) * | 1998-12-01 | 2002-10-22 | Nutool, Inc. | Polishing apparatus and method with a refreshing polishing belt and loadable housing |
US6634935B2 (en) * | 1998-12-01 | 2003-10-21 | Nutool, Inc. | Single drive system for a bi-directional linear chemical mechanical polishing apparatus |
US6464571B2 (en) * | 1998-12-01 | 2002-10-15 | Nutool, Inc. | Polishing apparatus and method with belt drive system adapted to extend the lifetime of a refreshing polishing belt provided therein |
US6238449B1 (en) | 1998-12-22 | 2001-05-29 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article having an abrasive coating containing a siloxane polymer |
US6239049B1 (en) | 1998-12-22 | 2001-05-29 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Aminoplast resin/thermoplastic polyamide presize coatings for abrasive article backings |
US6312484B1 (en) | 1998-12-22 | 2001-11-06 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Nonwoven abrasive articles and method of preparing same |
US6503564B1 (en) * | 1999-02-26 | 2003-01-07 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of coating microstructured substrates with polymeric layer(s), allowing preservation of surface feature profile |
US6634929B1 (en) | 1999-04-23 | 2003-10-21 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method for grinding glass |
US6458018B1 (en) | 1999-04-23 | 2002-10-01 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article suitable for abrading glass and glass ceramic workpieces |
JP4629174B2 (en) * | 1999-10-15 | 2011-02-09 | 大日本印刷株式会社 | Method and apparatus for creating silk fabric-like sheet |
US8111401B2 (en) | 1999-11-05 | 2012-02-07 | Robert Magnusson | Guided-mode resonance sensors employing angular, spectral, modal, and polarization diversity for high-precision sensing in compact formats |
US7167615B1 (en) | 1999-11-05 | 2007-01-23 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Resonant waveguide-grating filters and sensors and methods for making and using same |
US6776699B2 (en) | 2000-08-14 | 2004-08-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive pad for CMP |
US6951715B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2005-10-04 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Optical detection of label-free biomolecular interactions using microreplicated plastic sensor elements |
US7094595B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2006-08-22 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Label-free high-throughput optical technique for detecting biomolecular interactions |
US7615339B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2009-11-10 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Method for producing a colorimetric resonant reflection biosensor on rigid surfaces |
US7023544B2 (en) | 2000-10-30 | 2006-04-04 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Method and instrument for detecting biomolecular interactions |
US7575939B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2009-08-18 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Optical detection of label-free biomolecular interactions using microreplicated plastic sensor elements |
US7217574B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2007-05-15 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Method and apparatus for biosensor spectral shift detection |
US7875434B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2011-01-25 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Label-free methods for performing assays using a colorimetric resonant reflectance optical biosensor |
US7264973B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2007-09-04 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Label-free methods for performing assays using a colorimetric resonant optical biosensor |
US7175980B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2007-02-13 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Method of making a plastic colorimetric resonant biosensor device with liquid handling capabilities |
US7202076B2 (en) | 2000-10-30 | 2007-04-10 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Label-free high-throughput optical technique for detecting biomolecular interactions |
US20030113766A1 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2003-06-19 | Sru Biosystems, Llc | Amine activated colorimetric resonant biosensor |
US7306827B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2007-12-11 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Method and machine for replicating holographic gratings on a substrate |
US20030092075A1 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2003-05-15 | Sru Biosystems, Llc | Aldehyde chemical surface activation processes and test methods for colorimetric resonant sensors |
US7070987B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2006-07-04 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Guided mode resonant filter biosensor using a linear grating surface structure |
US7101660B2 (en) | 2000-10-30 | 2006-09-05 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Method for producing a colorimetric resonant reflection biosensor on rigid surfaces |
US7153702B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2006-12-26 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Label-free methods for performing assays using a colorimetric resonant reflectance optical biosensor |
US7371562B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2008-05-13 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Guided mode resonant filter biosensor using a linear grating surface structure |
US7142296B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2006-11-28 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Method and apparatus for detecting biomolecular interactions |
US7300803B2 (en) * | 2000-10-30 | 2007-11-27 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Label-free methods for performing assays using a colorimetric resonant reflectance optical biosensor |
US6582487B2 (en) | 2001-03-20 | 2003-06-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Discrete particles that include a polymeric material and articles formed therefrom |
US6605128B2 (en) | 2001-03-20 | 2003-08-12 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article having projections attached to a major surface thereof |
US20030017797A1 (en) * | 2001-03-28 | 2003-01-23 | Kendall Philip E. | Dual cured abrasive articles |
EP2236488A1 (en) | 2001-03-30 | 2010-10-06 | The Arizona Board of Regents on behalf of the University of Arizona | Materials, methods and uses for photochemical generation of acids and/or radical species |
US6599177B2 (en) * | 2001-06-25 | 2003-07-29 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives Technology Company | Coated abrasives with indicia |
US6846232B2 (en) * | 2001-12-28 | 2005-01-25 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Backing and abrasive product made with the backing and method of making and using the backing and abrasive product |
US6949128B2 (en) * | 2001-12-28 | 2005-09-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making an abrasive product |
US6939203B2 (en) * | 2002-04-18 | 2005-09-06 | Asm Nutool, Inc. | Fluid bearing slide assembly for workpiece polishing |
US7140812B2 (en) * | 2002-05-29 | 2006-11-28 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Diamond tool with a multi-tipped diamond |
US8360898B2 (en) * | 2002-06-11 | 2013-01-29 | Ben Huang | Grip |
US7862446B2 (en) * | 2007-08-14 | 2011-01-04 | Ben Huang | Grip having a varied gripping surface |
US7585230B2 (en) * | 2003-03-18 | 2009-09-08 | Ben Huang | Single panel golf club grip with EVA inside layer |
US7044989B2 (en) * | 2002-07-26 | 2006-05-16 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive product, method of making and using the same, and apparatus for making the same |
US7297170B2 (en) * | 2002-07-26 | 2007-11-20 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of using abrasive product |
US6833014B2 (en) | 2002-07-26 | 2004-12-21 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive product, method of making and using the same, and apparatus for making the same |
US7429492B2 (en) * | 2002-09-09 | 2008-09-30 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Multiwell plates with integrated biosensors and membranes |
US7927822B2 (en) * | 2002-09-09 | 2011-04-19 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Methods for screening cells and antibodies |
FR2845241B1 (en) * | 2002-09-26 | 2005-04-22 | Ge Med Sys Global Tech Co Llc | X-RAY EMISSION DEVICE AND X-RAY APPARATUS |
US7309614B1 (en) | 2002-12-04 | 2007-12-18 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Self-referencing biodetection method and patterned bioassays |
JP2006513573A (en) * | 2003-01-10 | 2006-04-20 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Pad construction for chemical mechanical planarization applications |
US6951504B2 (en) * | 2003-03-20 | 2005-10-04 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article with agglomerates and method of use |
US7497992B2 (en) * | 2003-05-08 | 2009-03-03 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Detection of biochemical interactions on a biosensor using tunable filters and tunable lasers |
AU2003902508A0 (en) * | 2003-05-21 | 2003-06-05 | Anthony Collins | Self supported rasp blade |
US8298780B2 (en) * | 2003-09-22 | 2012-10-30 | X-Body, Inc. | Methods of detection of changes in cells |
US20050060945A1 (en) * | 2003-09-23 | 2005-03-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making a coated abrasive |
US20050060942A1 (en) * | 2003-09-23 | 2005-03-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Structured abrasive article |
US7300479B2 (en) * | 2003-09-23 | 2007-11-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Compositions for abrasive articles |
US20050060941A1 (en) * | 2003-09-23 | 2005-03-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article and methods of making the same |
US7267700B2 (en) * | 2003-09-23 | 2007-09-11 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Structured abrasive with parabolic sides |
ES2400939T3 (en) | 2003-09-30 | 2013-04-15 | Kronoplus Technical Ag | Decorative paper with scattered corundum coated with an adhesive |
AU2004290375A1 (en) * | 2003-11-06 | 2005-05-26 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | High-density amine-functionalized surface |
US7588436B2 (en) * | 2003-11-11 | 2009-09-15 | Plastics Engineering & Technical Services, Inc. | Valve gate assembly |
CN1886232A (en) * | 2003-11-26 | 2006-12-27 | 3M创新有限公司 | Method of abrading a workpiece |
US20070191761A1 (en) * | 2004-02-23 | 2007-08-16 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of molding for microneedle arrays |
US7648622B2 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2010-01-19 | Novellus Systems, Inc. | System and method for electrochemical mechanical polishing |
US20050210756A1 (en) * | 2004-03-25 | 2005-09-29 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Coated abrasive products and processes for forming same |
US7150770B2 (en) * | 2004-06-18 | 2006-12-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article with tie layer, and method of making and using the same |
US7150771B2 (en) * | 2004-06-18 | 2006-12-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article with composite tie layer, and method of making and using the same |
US20060026904A1 (en) * | 2004-08-06 | 2006-02-09 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Composition, coated abrasive article, and methods of making the same |
JP2008522875A (en) * | 2004-12-07 | 2008-07-03 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Microneedle molding method |
US7344574B2 (en) * | 2005-06-27 | 2008-03-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article, and method of making and using the same |
US7344575B2 (en) * | 2005-06-27 | 2008-03-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Composition, treated backing, and abrasive articles containing the same |
ATE477833T1 (en) | 2005-06-27 | 2010-09-15 | 3M Innovative Properties Co | MICRONEEDLE CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY |
US7651863B2 (en) * | 2005-07-14 | 2010-01-26 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Surface-enhanced spectroscopic method, flexible structured substrate, and method of making the same |
US20070014997A1 (en) * | 2005-07-14 | 2007-01-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Tool and method of making and using the same |
US7906057B2 (en) * | 2005-07-14 | 2011-03-15 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Nanostructured article and method of making the same |
US7618306B2 (en) * | 2005-09-22 | 2009-11-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Conformable abrasive articles and methods of making and using the same |
US20070066186A1 (en) * | 2005-09-22 | 2007-03-22 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Flexible abrasive article and methods of making and using the same |
US7491251B2 (en) * | 2005-10-05 | 2009-02-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making a structured abrasive article |
US20080262416A1 (en) * | 2005-11-18 | 2008-10-23 | Duan Daniel C | Microneedle Arrays and Methods of Preparing Same |
US7566375B2 (en) * | 2006-01-25 | 2009-07-28 | Ben Huang | Panel grip with cut-outs and inserts |
US20070243798A1 (en) * | 2006-04-18 | 2007-10-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Embossed structured abrasive article and method of making and using the same |
US7410413B2 (en) * | 2006-04-27 | 2008-08-12 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Structured abrasive article and method of making and using the same |
US7476064B2 (en) * | 2006-04-27 | 2009-01-13 | Kyocera Corporation | Cutting tool and method of cutting workpiece |
JP4851840B2 (en) | 2006-05-10 | 2012-01-11 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Structure duplication method and apparatus |
US7347792B2 (en) * | 2006-05-22 | 2008-03-25 | Ben Huang | Decorative golf club grip |
FI121654B (en) | 2006-07-10 | 2011-02-28 | Kwh Mirka Ab Oy | Method for making a flexible abrasive wheel and a flexible abrasive wheel |
JP4396776B2 (en) * | 2006-07-27 | 2010-01-13 | 凸版印刷株式会社 | Manufacturing method of microneedle |
AU2007313830A1 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2008-05-08 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Method for blocking non-specific protein binding on a functionalized surface |
US7497885B2 (en) | 2006-12-22 | 2009-03-03 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive articles with nanoparticulate fillers and method for making and using them |
US8083820B2 (en) | 2006-12-22 | 2011-12-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Structured fixed abrasive articles including surface treated nano-ceria filler, and method for making and using the same |
US7862445B2 (en) * | 2007-03-21 | 2011-01-04 | Ben Huang | Grip having a stabilized gripping surface |
US20080233845A1 (en) | 2007-03-21 | 2008-09-25 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive articles, rotationally reciprocating tools, and methods |
MX2009010119A (en) * | 2007-03-21 | 2009-10-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Co | Methods of removing defects in surfaces. |
CN101743465A (en) * | 2007-04-19 | 2010-06-16 | Sru生物系统公司 | Method for employing a biosensor to detect small molecules that bind directly to immobilized targets |
FI20075533L (en) * | 2007-07-10 | 2009-01-11 | Kwh Mirka Ab Oy | Abrasive product and method for making the same |
WO2009009718A1 (en) * | 2007-07-11 | 2009-01-15 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Methods of identifying modulators of ion channels |
US9134307B2 (en) * | 2007-07-11 | 2015-09-15 | X-Body, Inc. | Method for determining ion channel modulating properties of a test reagent |
US8038750B2 (en) | 2007-07-13 | 2011-10-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Structured abrasive with overlayer, and method of making and using the same |
EP2178697B1 (en) * | 2007-08-13 | 2014-03-26 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive laminate disc and methods of making the same |
US8080073B2 (en) * | 2007-12-20 | 2011-12-20 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article having a plurality of precisely-shaped abrasive composites |
US8123828B2 (en) | 2007-12-27 | 2012-02-28 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making abrasive shards, shaped abrasive particles with an opening, or dish-shaped abrasive particles |
US8034137B2 (en) * | 2007-12-27 | 2011-10-11 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped, fractured abrasive particle, abrasive article using same and method of making |
US8444458B2 (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2013-05-21 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Plasma treated abrasive article and method of making same |
US8257936B2 (en) | 2008-04-09 | 2012-09-04 | X-Body Inc. | High resolution label free analysis of cellular properties |
EP2304500A1 (en) * | 2008-06-04 | 2011-04-06 | SRU Biosystems, Inc. | Detection of promiscuous small submicrometer aggregates |
US8979613B2 (en) * | 2008-06-11 | 2015-03-17 | Advanced Diamond Technologies, Inc. | Nano-fabricated structured diamond abrasive article |
CN102131887B (en) * | 2008-07-03 | 2013-07-31 | 3M创新有限公司 | Fixed abrasive particles and articles made therefrom |
EP2327088B1 (en) | 2008-08-28 | 2019-01-09 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Structured abrasive article, method of making the same, and use in wafer planarization |
KR101691240B1 (en) | 2008-12-17 | 2016-12-29 | 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 컴파니 | Shaped abrasive particles with grooves |
US8142891B2 (en) | 2008-12-17 | 2012-03-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Dish-shaped abrasive particles with a recessed surface |
US8142532B2 (en) * | 2008-12-17 | 2012-03-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped abrasive particles with an opening |
US8142531B2 (en) | 2008-12-17 | 2012-03-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped abrasive particles with a sloping sidewall |
US10137556B2 (en) * | 2009-06-22 | 2018-11-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped abrasive particles with low roundness factor |
RU2486047C2 (en) * | 2008-12-22 | 2013-06-27 | Сэнт-Гобэн Эбрейзивс, Инк. | Rigid or flexible macro porous abrasive article |
US9661833B2 (en) | 2009-04-10 | 2017-05-30 | Ben Huang | Multi-layered grip |
EP2419243A1 (en) * | 2009-04-17 | 2012-02-22 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Metal particle transfer article, metal modified substrate, and method of making and using the same |
US20100273185A1 (en) * | 2009-04-27 | 2010-10-28 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Detection of Biased Agonist Activation |
US9221148B2 (en) | 2009-04-30 | 2015-12-29 | Rdc Holdings, Llc | Method and apparatus for processing sliders for disk drives, and to various processing media for the same |
US8801497B2 (en) | 2009-04-30 | 2014-08-12 | Rdc Holdings, Llc | Array of abrasive members with resilient support |
AU2010248784A1 (en) * | 2009-05-15 | 2011-12-01 | Sru Biosystems, Inc | Detection of changes in cell populations and mixed cell populations |
USD610430S1 (en) | 2009-06-18 | 2010-02-23 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Stem for a power tool attachment |
US8628597B2 (en) * | 2009-06-25 | 2014-01-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of sorting abrasive particles, abrasive particle distributions, and abrasive articles including the same |
US20100330890A1 (en) | 2009-06-30 | 2010-12-30 | Zine-Eddine Boutaghou | Polishing pad with array of fluidized gimballed abrasive members |
WO2011017022A2 (en) | 2009-07-28 | 2011-02-10 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article and methods of ablating coated abrasive articles |
US8701211B2 (en) * | 2009-08-26 | 2014-04-15 | Advanced Diamond Technologies, Inc. | Method to reduce wedge effects in molded trigonal tips |
US8425278B2 (en) | 2009-08-26 | 2013-04-23 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Structured abrasive article and method of using the same |
US8348723B2 (en) * | 2009-09-16 | 2013-01-08 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Structured abrasive article and method of using the same |
US8480772B2 (en) | 2009-12-22 | 2013-07-09 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Transfer assisted screen printing method of making shaped abrasive particles and the resulting shaped abrasive particles |
US9180573B2 (en) | 2010-03-03 | 2015-11-10 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Bonded abrasive wheel |
WO2011120042A1 (en) * | 2010-03-26 | 2011-09-29 | Sru Biosystems, Inc. | Use of induced pluripotent cells and other cells for screening compound libraries |
CA2797096C (en) | 2010-04-27 | 2018-07-10 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Ceramic shaped abrasive particles, methods of making the same, and abrasive articles containing the same |
WO2011142986A1 (en) | 2010-05-11 | 2011-11-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Fixed abrasive pad with surfactant for chemical mechanical planarization |
CN103025490B (en) * | 2010-08-04 | 2016-05-11 | 3M创新有限公司 | Intersect plate forming abrasive particle |
RU2457934C2 (en) * | 2010-09-13 | 2012-08-10 | Федеральное государственное унитарное предприятие "Государственный космический научно-производственный центр имени М.В. Хруничева" (ФГУП "ГКНПЦ им. М.В. Хруничева") | Method of making abrasive tool work surface |
US9039797B2 (en) | 2010-11-01 | 2015-05-26 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped abrasive particles and method of making |
WO2012092619A2 (en) | 2010-12-30 | 2012-07-05 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Coated abrasive aggregates and products containg same |
BR112013016734A2 (en) | 2010-12-31 | 2019-09-24 | Saint Gobain Ceramics | abrasive particles with particular shapes and methods of deformation of such particles |
TWI471196B (en) * | 2011-03-31 | 2015-02-01 | Saint Gobain Abrasives Inc | Abrasive article for high-speed grinding operations |
WO2013003831A2 (en) | 2011-06-30 | 2013-01-03 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Liquid phase sintered silicon carbide abrasive particles |
US8986409B2 (en) | 2011-06-30 | 2015-03-24 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Abrasive articles including abrasive particles of silicon nitride |
WO2013009484A2 (en) | 2011-07-12 | 2013-01-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making ceramic shaped abrasive particles, sol-gel composition, and ceramic shaped abrasive particles |
JP6049727B2 (en) | 2011-09-07 | 2016-12-21 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Method for polishing a workpiece |
EP3590657A1 (en) | 2011-09-07 | 2020-01-08 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Bonded abrasive article |
EP2567784B1 (en) | 2011-09-08 | 2019-07-31 | 3M Innovative Properties Co. | Bonded abrasive article |
US9517546B2 (en) | 2011-09-26 | 2016-12-13 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Abrasive articles including abrasive particulate materials, coated abrasives using the abrasive particulate materials and methods of forming |
WO2013049526A2 (en) * | 2011-09-29 | 2013-04-04 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Abrasive products and methods for finishing hard surfaces |
CN102335885B (en) * | 2011-10-08 | 2013-11-20 | 河源市树熊超硬磨具有限公司 | Diamond grinding wheel for ceramic grinding and preparation method thereof |
JP6099660B2 (en) | 2011-11-09 | 2017-03-22 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Compound polishing wheel |
KR101242011B1 (en) | 2011-11-17 | 2013-03-26 | 주식회사 디어포스 | Method of manufacturing an abrasive tape |
RU2490115C1 (en) * | 2011-12-06 | 2013-08-20 | Федеральное государственное бюджетное образовательное учреждение высшего профессионального образования "Ульяновский государственный технический университет" | Method of making abrasive tool on organic thermoset binder |
CN104114664B (en) | 2011-12-30 | 2016-06-15 | 圣戈本陶瓷及塑料股份有限公司 | Form molding abrasive grains |
EP3517245B1 (en) | 2011-12-30 | 2023-12-13 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics Inc. | Shaped abrasive particle and method of forming same |
CN104114327B (en) | 2011-12-30 | 2018-06-05 | 圣戈本陶瓷及塑料股份有限公司 | Composite molding abrasive grains and forming method thereof |
CA2987793C (en) | 2012-01-10 | 2019-11-05 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Abrasive particles having complex shapes and methods of forming same |
WO2013106602A1 (en) | 2012-01-10 | 2013-07-18 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Abrasive particles having particular shapes and methods of forming such particles |
US9321947B2 (en) | 2012-01-10 | 2016-04-26 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Abrasive products and methods for finishing coated surfaces |
US9138867B2 (en) | 2012-03-16 | 2015-09-22 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Abrasive products and methods for finishing surfaces |
US9242346B2 (en) | 2012-03-30 | 2016-01-26 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Abrasive products having fibrillated fibers |
US8968435B2 (en) | 2012-03-30 | 2015-03-03 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Abrasive products and methods for fine polishing of ophthalmic lenses |
US9771504B2 (en) | 2012-04-04 | 2017-09-26 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive particles, method of making abrasive particles, and abrasive articles |
SG11201406273XA (en) * | 2012-04-06 | 2014-11-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Co | Tools for making retroreflective articles |
US20130271172A1 (en) * | 2012-04-13 | 2013-10-17 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Probe apparatus and method |
KR101389572B1 (en) | 2012-04-23 | 2014-04-29 | 주식회사 디어포스 | Abrasive article |
EP2662185A1 (en) * | 2012-05-11 | 2013-11-13 | Cerium Group Limited | A lens surfacing pad |
KR101888347B1 (en) | 2012-05-23 | 2018-08-16 | 생-고뱅 세라믹스 앤드 플라스틱스, 인코포레이티드 | Shaped abrasive particles and methods of forming same |
DE102012011288A1 (en) * | 2012-06-08 | 2013-12-12 | Hochschule Ostwestfalen-Lippe | Method for manufacturing abrasive tape for use in high-speed grinding device, involves coating abrasive on tape, providing printed and flexible base, and enabling manufacturing direction and grinding direction to be different |
JP6143859B2 (en) | 2012-06-27 | 2017-06-07 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Abrasive article |
BR112014032152B1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2022-09-20 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc | ABRASIVE PARTICLES HAVING PARTICULAR FORMATS AND ABRASIVE ARTICLES |
RU2620846C2 (en) * | 2012-07-06 | 2017-05-30 | 3М Инновейтив Пропертиз Компани | Abrasive material with coating |
CN102729158B (en) * | 2012-07-12 | 2014-07-30 | 嵩山特材集团有限公司 | Organic bond accumulative grinding material and method for preparing abrasive cloth by organic bond accumulative grinding material |
EP2692814A1 (en) * | 2012-08-02 | 2014-02-05 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Abrasive grit comprising first surface without corner and second surface with corner |
EP2692818A1 (en) * | 2012-08-02 | 2014-02-05 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Abrasive grit with main surfaces and secondary surfaces |
EP2880117B1 (en) | 2012-08-02 | 2017-03-01 | Robert Bosch GmbH | Abrasive grit comprising first surface without corner and second surface with corner |
US10710211B2 (en) | 2012-08-02 | 2020-07-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive articles with precisely shaped features and method of making thereof |
EP2692813A1 (en) * | 2012-08-02 | 2014-02-05 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Abrasive grit with ridges of varying heights |
US9956664B2 (en) | 2012-08-02 | 2018-05-01 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive element precursor with precisely shaped features and methods of making thereof |
CN104822494B (en) | 2012-10-15 | 2017-11-28 | 圣戈班磨料磨具有限公司 | The method of abrasive particle and this particle of formation with given shape |
WO2014070468A1 (en) | 2012-10-31 | 2014-05-08 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped abrasive particles, methods of making, and abrasive articles including the same |
WO2014106173A1 (en) | 2012-12-31 | 2014-07-03 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Particulate materials and methods of forming same |
WO2014140689A1 (en) | 2013-03-12 | 2014-09-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Bonded abrasive article |
CN107685296B (en) | 2013-03-29 | 2020-03-06 | 圣戈班磨料磨具有限公司 | Abrasive particles having a particular shape, methods of forming such particles, and uses thereof |
EP2981378B1 (en) | 2013-04-05 | 2021-06-30 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Sintered abrasive particles, method of making the same, and abrasive articles including the same |
EP2996818B1 (en) * | 2013-05-17 | 2018-07-25 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making easy-clean surface |
JP2016530109A (en) | 2013-06-07 | 2016-09-29 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Method of forming substrate indentation, polishing wheel, and cover |
TW201502263A (en) | 2013-06-28 | 2015-01-16 | Saint Gobain Ceramics | Abrasive article including shaped abrasive particles |
US9878954B2 (en) | 2013-09-13 | 2018-01-30 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Vacuum glazing pillars for insulated glass units |
WO2015048768A1 (en) | 2013-09-30 | 2015-04-02 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Shaped abrasive particles and methods of forming same |
MX2016005756A (en) | 2013-11-12 | 2016-07-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Co | Structured abrasive articles and methods of using the same. |
CN104511851A (en) * | 2013-11-19 | 2015-04-15 | 东莞金太阳研磨股份有限公司 | PCB (printed circuit board) buffing wheel production method |
CA2931631C (en) * | 2013-12-06 | 2018-06-19 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Coated abrasive article including a non-woven material |
CN105829025B (en) | 2013-12-23 | 2019-02-26 | 3M创新有限公司 | The method for preparing band coating abrasive product |
WO2015100220A1 (en) | 2013-12-23 | 2015-07-02 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | A coated abrasive article maker apparatus |
JP6290428B2 (en) | 2013-12-31 | 2018-03-07 | サンーゴバン アブレイシブズ,インコーポレイティド | Abrasive articles containing shaped abrasive particles |
US9771507B2 (en) | 2014-01-31 | 2017-09-26 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Shaped abrasive particle including dopant material and method of forming same |
AU2015247826A1 (en) | 2014-04-14 | 2016-11-10 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Abrasive article including shaped abrasive particles |
BR112016023880A2 (en) | 2014-04-14 | 2017-08-15 | Saint Gobain Ceramics | abrasive article including molded abrasive particles |
JP6640110B2 (en) | 2014-04-21 | 2020-02-05 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Abrasive particles and abrasive articles containing the same |
SG11201608996TA (en) | 2014-05-02 | 2016-11-29 | 3M Innovative Properties Co | Interrupted structured abrasive article and methods of polishing a workpiece |
US10183379B2 (en) | 2014-05-20 | 2019-01-22 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive material with different sets of plurality of abrasive elements |
JP6611414B2 (en) * | 2014-05-27 | 2019-11-27 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Paint surface finishing method and polishing material |
WO2015184355A1 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2015-12-03 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Method of using an abrasive article including shaped abrasive particles |
CN104139345B (en) * | 2014-07-23 | 2017-05-10 | 上虞市自远磨具有限公司 | Wear-resisting grinding tool with thin film base and manufacturing method of wear-resisting grinding tool |
DE112015003830T5 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2017-05-04 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive abrasive article with bundled abrasive particle structures and method of manufacture |
WO2016044158A1 (en) | 2014-09-15 | 2016-03-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Methods of making abrasive articles and bonded abrasive wheel preparable thereby |
EP3209461A4 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2018-08-22 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive preforms, method of making an abrasive article, and bonded abrasive article |
US9914864B2 (en) | 2014-12-23 | 2018-03-13 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Shaped abrasive particles and method of forming same |
US9707529B2 (en) | 2014-12-23 | 2017-07-18 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Composite shaped abrasive particles and method of forming same |
US9676981B2 (en) | 2014-12-24 | 2017-06-13 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Shaped abrasive particle fractions and method of forming same |
WO2016140840A1 (en) | 2015-03-03 | 2016-09-09 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Gel compositions, shaped gel articles and a method of making a sintered article |
US10307889B2 (en) | 2015-03-30 | 2019-06-04 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article and method of making the same |
WO2016161157A1 (en) | 2015-03-31 | 2016-10-06 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Fixed abrasive articles and methods of forming same |
TWI634200B (en) | 2015-03-31 | 2018-09-01 | 聖高拜磨料有限公司 | Fixed abrasive articles and methods of forming same |
EP3283258B1 (en) | 2015-04-14 | 2019-04-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Nonwoven abrasive article and method of making the same |
JP2018516767A (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2018-06-28 | サン−ゴバン セラミックス アンド プラスティクス,インコーポレイティド | Abrasive articles containing shaped abrasive particles |
KR20180010311A (en) | 2015-06-19 | 2018-01-30 | 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 컴파니 | Abrasive articles with abrasive particles having a random rotation orientation within a certain range |
KR102625791B1 (en) | 2015-10-07 | 2024-01-15 | 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 컴파니 | Epoxy-functional silane coupling agents, surface-modified abrasive particles, and bonded abrasive articles |
US9849563B2 (en) | 2015-11-05 | 2017-12-26 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article and method of making the same |
EP3374098A4 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2019-07-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of shape sorting crushed abrasive particles |
EP3423235B1 (en) | 2016-03-03 | 2022-08-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Depressed center grinding wheel |
CN108883520B (en) | 2016-04-01 | 2020-11-03 | 3M创新有限公司 | Elongated shaped abrasive particles, methods of making the same, and abrasive articles comprising the same |
US10702974B2 (en) | 2016-05-06 | 2020-07-07 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Curable composition, abrasive article, and method of making the same |
EP4071224A3 (en) | 2016-05-10 | 2023-01-04 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics and Plastics, Inc. | Methods of forming abrasive articles |
WO2018042290A1 (en) | 2016-08-31 | 2018-03-08 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Halogen and polyhalide mediated phenolic polymerization |
US10436984B2 (en) | 2016-09-02 | 2019-10-08 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Optical fiber splice element and optical network |
WO2018044565A1 (en) | 2016-09-02 | 2018-03-08 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped gel articles and sintered articles prepared therefrom |
EP3516006A4 (en) | 2016-09-21 | 2020-03-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive particle with enhanced retention features |
EP3515662B1 (en) | 2016-09-26 | 2024-01-10 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Nonwoven abrasive articles having electrostatically-oriented abrasive particles and methods of making same |
CN109789534B (en) | 2016-09-27 | 2022-11-29 | 3M创新有限公司 | Open coated abrasive article and method of abrading |
EP4349896A2 (en) | 2016-09-29 | 2024-04-10 | Saint-Gobain Abrasives, Inc. | Fixed abrasive articles and methods of forming same |
EP3519138A4 (en) | 2016-09-30 | 2020-09-02 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Multipurpose tooling for shaped particles |
WO2018063960A1 (en) | 2016-09-30 | 2018-04-05 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article and method of making the same |
CN109890931B (en) | 2016-10-25 | 2021-03-16 | 3M创新有限公司 | Magnetizable abrasive particles and abrasive articles comprising magnetizable abrasive particles |
WO2018080756A1 (en) | 2016-10-25 | 2018-05-03 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Functional abrasive particles, abrasive articles, and methods of making the same |
US11597860B2 (en) | 2016-10-25 | 2023-03-07 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Magnetizable abrasive particle and method of making the same |
EP3532249A4 (en) | 2016-10-25 | 2020-06-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Structured abrasive articles and methods of making the same |
US11484990B2 (en) | 2016-10-25 | 2022-11-01 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Bonded abrasive wheel and method of making the same |
EP3533075A4 (en) | 2016-10-25 | 2020-07-01 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making magnetizable abrasive particles |
EP3532562B1 (en) | 2016-10-25 | 2021-05-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Magnetizable abrasive particle and method of making the same |
WO2018106587A1 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2018-06-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Flexible abrasive article |
CN110062681A (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-07-26 | 3M创新有限公司 | Flexible abrasive article |
WO2018106583A1 (en) | 2016-12-09 | 2018-06-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article and method of grinding |
US10563105B2 (en) | 2017-01-31 | 2020-02-18 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Abrasive article including shaped abrasive particles |
US10759024B2 (en) | 2017-01-31 | 2020-09-01 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Abrasive article including shaped abrasive particles |
US10653124B2 (en) | 2017-05-03 | 2020-05-19 | Winn Incorporated | Reel component and method of manufacturing same |
US10865148B2 (en) | 2017-06-21 | 2020-12-15 | Saint-Gobain Ceramics & Plastics, Inc. | Particulate materials and methods of forming same |
CN113174235A (en) | 2017-10-02 | 2021-07-27 | 3M创新有限公司 | Elongated abrasive particles, methods of making the same, and abrasive articles comprising the same |
WO2019102328A1 (en) * | 2017-11-21 | 2019-05-31 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive disc and methods of making and using the same |
CN111372727B (en) | 2017-11-21 | 2022-02-15 | 3M创新有限公司 | Coated abrasive discs and methods of making and using the same |
US11597059B2 (en) | 2017-11-21 | 2023-03-07 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive disc and methods of making and using the same |
EP3720654A1 (en) | 2017-12-08 | 2020-10-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article |
JP7337062B2 (en) | 2017-12-08 | 2023-09-01 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | porous abrasive article |
USD849067S1 (en) * | 2017-12-12 | 2019-05-21 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive disc |
USD879164S1 (en) * | 2017-12-12 | 2020-03-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive disc |
USD849066S1 (en) * | 2017-12-12 | 2019-05-21 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive disc |
USD870782S1 (en) * | 2017-12-12 | 2019-12-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive disc |
USD862538S1 (en) * | 2017-12-12 | 2019-10-08 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive disc |
WO2019125995A1 (en) | 2017-12-18 | 2019-06-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Phenolic resin composition comprising polymerized ionic groups, abrasive articles and methods |
JP7158147B2 (en) * | 2018-01-05 | 2022-10-21 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Polishing sheet and polishing method |
TW201940654A (en) | 2018-03-21 | 2019-10-16 | 美商3M新設資產公司 | Structured abrasives containing polishing materials for use in the home |
CN111971363A (en) | 2018-04-12 | 2020-11-20 | 3M创新有限公司 | Magnetizable abrasive particles and method of making same |
EP3784435B1 (en) | 2018-04-24 | 2023-08-23 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making a coated abrasive article |
US11602822B2 (en) | 2018-04-24 | 2023-03-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article and method of making the same |
WO2019207417A1 (en) | 2018-04-24 | 2019-10-31 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making a coated abrasive article |
CN110549258B (en) * | 2018-06-01 | 2020-09-11 | 东莞市中微纳米科技有限公司 | Polishing sheet and preparation method thereof |
WO2019239267A1 (en) | 2018-06-14 | 2019-12-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of treating a surface, surface-modified abrasive particles, and resin-bond abrasive articles |
CN112424300A (en) | 2018-06-14 | 2021-02-26 | 3M创新有限公司 | Adhesion promoter for curable compositions |
JP2021534006A (en) | 2018-08-13 | 2021-12-09 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Structured polished articles and methods for manufacturing them |
EP3843947A1 (en) | 2018-08-27 | 2021-07-07 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Embedded electronic circuit in grinding wheels and methods of embedding |
EP3863799A1 (en) | 2018-10-09 | 2021-08-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Treated backing and coated abrasive article including the same |
US20210380857A1 (en) | 2018-10-11 | 2021-12-09 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Supported abrasive particles, abrasive articles, and methods of making the same |
WO2020099969A1 (en) | 2018-11-15 | 2020-05-22 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive belt and methods of making and using the same |
USD879165S1 (en) * | 2018-11-15 | 2020-03-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive belt |
KR20210089728A (en) | 2018-11-15 | 2021-07-16 | 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 컴파니 | Coated abrasive belts and methods of making and using the same |
USD879166S1 (en) * | 2018-11-15 | 2020-03-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive belt |
WO2020128853A1 (en) | 2018-12-18 | 2020-06-25 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Tooling splice accommodation for abrasive article production |
CN113260486A (en) | 2018-12-18 | 2021-08-13 | 3M创新有限公司 | Coated abrasive article with spacer particles and method and apparatus for making same |
WO2020128708A1 (en) | 2018-12-18 | 2020-06-25 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive articles and methods of making coated abrasive articles |
US20220152783A1 (en) | 2019-02-11 | 2022-05-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article |
EP3924149A1 (en) | 2019-02-11 | 2021-12-22 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive articles and methods of making and using the same |
CN113710423A (en) | 2019-04-16 | 2021-11-26 | 3M创新有限公司 | Abrasive article and method of making same |
US20220306923A1 (en) | 2019-06-28 | 2022-09-29 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Magnetizable abrasive particles and method of making the same |
US11577367B2 (en) | 2019-07-18 | 2023-02-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Electrostatic particle alignment method and abrasive article |
EP4045608B1 (en) | 2019-10-14 | 2023-07-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Magnetizable abrasive particle and method of making the same |
US20220339761A1 (en) | 2019-10-17 | 2022-10-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive articles and method of making the same |
EP4048477A1 (en) | 2019-10-23 | 2022-08-31 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped abrasive particles with concave void within one of the plurality of edges |
CN114761177A (en) | 2019-12-06 | 2022-07-15 | 3M创新有限公司 | Grid abrasive and preparation method thereof |
US20230001544A1 (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2023-01-05 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive articles and methods of making coated abrasive articles |
US20230001541A1 (en) | 2019-12-09 | 2023-01-05 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article |
WO2021124059A1 (en) | 2019-12-16 | 2021-06-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Bonded abrasive article and method of making the same |
JP2021098250A (en) | 2019-12-20 | 2021-07-01 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Polishing sheet and polishing method |
KR20220116556A (en) | 2019-12-27 | 2022-08-23 | 세인트-고바인 세라믹스 앤드 플라스틱스, 인크. | Abrasive articles and methods of forming same |
WO2021152444A1 (en) | 2020-01-31 | 2021-08-05 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive articles |
EP4103356A1 (en) | 2020-02-10 | 2022-12-21 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article and method of making the same |
WO2021186326A1 (en) | 2020-03-18 | 2021-09-23 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article |
RU2739183C1 (en) * | 2020-03-19 | 2020-12-21 | Акционерное общество «Обнинское научно-производственное предприятие «Технология» им. А.Г.Ромашина» | Method of machining large-size complex-shaped ceramic articles |
WO2021214605A1 (en) | 2020-04-23 | 2021-10-28 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped abrasive particles |
WO2021229392A1 (en) | 2020-05-11 | 2021-11-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive body and method of making the same |
US20230226665A1 (en) | 2020-05-19 | 2023-07-20 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Porous coated abrasive article and method of making the same |
WO2021245492A1 (en) | 2020-06-04 | 2021-12-09 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Incomplete polygonal shaped abrasive particles, methods of manufacture and articles containing the same |
WO2021245494A1 (en) | 2020-06-04 | 2021-12-09 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Shaped abrasive particles and methods of manufacture the same |
US20230150092A1 (en) | 2020-06-30 | 2023-05-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive articles and methods of making and using the same |
US20230286112A1 (en) | 2020-07-28 | 2023-09-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article and method of making the same |
WO2022023848A1 (en) | 2020-07-30 | 2022-02-03 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of abrading a workpiece |
CN116157235A (en) | 2020-07-30 | 2023-05-23 | 3M创新有限公司 | Abrasive article and method of making the same |
WO2022034397A1 (en) | 2020-08-10 | 2022-02-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive system and method of using the same |
WO2022034443A1 (en) | 2020-08-10 | 2022-02-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive articles and method of making the same |
EP4225532A1 (en) | 2020-10-08 | 2023-08-16 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article and method of making the same |
US20230356361A1 (en) | 2020-10-09 | 2023-11-09 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive article and method of making the same |
WO2022090821A1 (en) | 2020-10-28 | 2022-05-05 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making a coated abrasive article and coated abrasive article |
US20230416445A1 (en) | 2020-11-12 | 2023-12-28 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Curable composition and abrasive articles made using the same |
WO2022162580A1 (en) | 2021-02-01 | 2022-08-04 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of making a coated abrasive article and coated abrasive article |
WO2022229744A1 (en) | 2021-04-30 | 2022-11-03 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive cut-off wheels and methods of making the same |
WO2022263986A1 (en) | 2021-06-15 | 2022-12-22 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Coated abrasive article including biodegradable thermoset resin and method of making and using the same |
CN113319748A (en) * | 2021-06-18 | 2021-08-31 | 北京林业大学 | Preparation method of accumulated abrasive belt for grinding wood material and abrasive belt |
CN114074296A (en) * | 2021-06-24 | 2022-02-22 | 东莞市华冠新材料科技有限公司 | Grinding body and preparation method thereof, and grinding disc and grinding pad embedded with grinding body |
WO2023084362A1 (en) | 2021-11-15 | 2023-05-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Nonwoven abrasive articles and methods of making the same |
WO2023100104A1 (en) | 2021-11-30 | 2023-06-08 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive articles and systems |
WO2023156980A1 (en) | 2022-02-21 | 2023-08-24 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Nonwoven abrasive article and methods of making the same |
WO2023180877A1 (en) | 2022-03-21 | 2023-09-28 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Curable composition, treated backing, coated abrasive articles including the same, and methods of making and using the same |
WO2023180880A1 (en) | 2022-03-21 | 2023-09-28 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Curable composition, coated abrasive article containing the same, and methods of making and using the same |
WO2023209518A1 (en) | 2022-04-26 | 2023-11-02 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Abrasive articles, methods of manufacture and use thereof |
Family Cites Families (126)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US29808A (en) * | 1860-08-28 | Improved gage for double-seaming machines | ||
US1988065A (en) * | 1931-09-26 | 1935-01-15 | Carborundum Co | Manufacture of open-spaced abrasive fabrics |
US1941962A (en) * | 1931-10-03 | 1934-01-02 | Carborundum Co | Manufacture of open space coated abrasive paper by the use of paraffin and other hydrophobic materials |
US2001911A (en) * | 1932-04-21 | 1935-05-21 | Carborundum Co | Abrasive articles |
US2009824A (en) * | 1932-09-16 | 1935-07-30 | Ind Patents Corp | Measuring and packaging method |
US2015658A (en) * | 1933-01-04 | 1935-10-01 | Stratmore Company | Method of forming abrasive articles |
US2108645A (en) * | 1933-03-18 | 1938-02-15 | Carborundum Co | Manufacture of flexible abrasive articles |
US2115897A (en) * | 1935-05-15 | 1938-05-03 | Carborundum Co | Abrasive article |
US2242877A (en) * | 1939-03-15 | 1941-05-20 | Albertson & Co Inc | Abrasive disk and method of making the same |
US2252683A (en) * | 1939-04-29 | 1941-08-19 | Albertson & Co Inc | Method of form setting abrasive disks |
US2292261A (en) * | 1940-02-19 | 1942-08-04 | Albertson & Co Inc | Abrasive disk and method of making the same |
FR881239A (en) | 1941-12-17 | 1943-04-19 | New process for manufacturing and using abrasive compositions | |
US3057256A (en) * | 1952-03-10 | 1962-10-09 | Richard T Erban | Optical screen |
US2952951A (en) * | 1952-07-28 | 1960-09-20 | Simpson Harry Arthur | Abrasive or like materials and articles |
US2755607A (en) * | 1953-06-01 | 1956-07-24 | Norton Co | Coated abrasives |
US2876086A (en) * | 1954-06-21 | 1959-03-03 | Minnesota Mining & Mfg | Abrasive structures and method of making |
US2806772A (en) * | 1954-09-15 | 1957-09-17 | Electro Refractories & Abrasiv | Abrasive bodies |
US2907146A (en) * | 1957-05-21 | 1959-10-06 | Milwaukee Motive Mfg Co | Grinding discs |
US3048482A (en) * | 1958-10-22 | 1962-08-07 | Rexall Drug Co | Abrasive articles and methods of making the same |
US3116574A (en) * | 1960-07-15 | 1964-01-07 | Metal Textile Corp | Disposable pot cleaner and scourer |
US3211634A (en) * | 1961-02-21 | 1965-10-12 | A P De Sanno & Son Inc | Method of producing abrasive surface layers |
GB1005448A (en) | 1962-04-19 | 1965-09-22 | Rexall Drug Chemical | Abrasive articles and methods of making the same |
US3549341A (en) * | 1968-08-05 | 1970-12-22 | Minnesota Mining & Mfg | Method for producing pyramidal shaped tumbling media |
US3641719A (en) * | 1969-03-12 | 1972-02-15 | Crown Zellerbach Corp | Cleaning towel |
US4038047A (en) * | 1969-04-14 | 1977-07-26 | Norton Company | Method of making a flexible resilient abrasive |
US3605349A (en) * | 1969-05-08 | 1971-09-20 | Frederick B Anthon | Abrasive finishing article |
JPS4823595B1 (en) * | 1969-06-17 | 1973-07-14 | ||
US3594865A (en) * | 1969-07-10 | 1971-07-27 | American Velcro Inc | Apparatus for molding plastic shapes in molding recesses formed in moving endless wire dies |
US3517466A (en) * | 1969-07-18 | 1970-06-30 | Ferro Corp | Stone polishing wheel for contoured surfaces |
BE759502A (en) * | 1969-11-28 | 1971-05-27 | Bmi Lab | ABRASIVE TOOL, IN PARTICULAR GRINDING WHEEL, AND ITS MANUFACTURING PROCESS |
US3615302A (en) * | 1970-06-18 | 1971-10-26 | Norton Co | Thermoset-resin impregnated high-speed vitreous grinding wheel |
US3689346A (en) * | 1970-09-29 | 1972-09-05 | Rowland Dev Corp | Method for producing retroreflective material |
US3712706A (en) * | 1971-01-04 | 1973-01-23 | American Cyanamid Co | Retroreflective surface |
FR2129926B1 (en) * | 1971-03-22 | 1973-12-28 | Joos Pierre | |
US3859407A (en) * | 1972-05-15 | 1975-01-07 | Corning Glass Works | Method of manufacturing particles of uniform size and shape |
USRE29808E (en) | 1973-09-26 | 1978-10-24 | Norddeutsche Schleifmittel-Indutrie Christiansen & Co. | Hollow body grinding materials |
US4011358A (en) * | 1974-07-23 | 1977-03-08 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Article having a coextruded polyester support film |
AT347283B (en) * | 1975-03-07 | 1978-12-27 | Collo Gmbh | FOAM BODY FOR CLEANING, SCRUBBING AND / OR POLISHING PURPOSES AND THE LIKE. |
US3991527A (en) * | 1975-07-10 | 1976-11-16 | Bates Abrasive Products, Inc. | Coated abrasive disc |
US4318766A (en) * | 1975-09-02 | 1982-03-09 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Process of using photocopolymerizable compositions based on epoxy and hydroxyl-containing organic materials |
GB1501570A (en) * | 1975-11-11 | 1978-02-15 | Showa Denko Kk | Abrader for mirror polishing of glass and method for mirror polishing |
DE2725704A1 (en) | 1976-06-11 | 1977-12-22 | Swarovski Tyrolit Schleif | PRODUCTION OF CORUNDUM-CONTAINING GRINDING GRAINS, FOR EXAMPLE FROM ZIRCONIUM CORUNDUM |
DE2813258C2 (en) * | 1978-03-28 | 1985-04-25 | Sia Schweizer Schmirgel- & Schleifindustrie Ag, Frauenfeld | Grinding wheel |
SU749650A1 (en) | 1978-06-12 | 1980-07-23 | Украинский полиграфический институт им.Ивана Федорова | Apparatus for making abrasive belts |
US4576850A (en) * | 1978-07-20 | 1986-03-18 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Shaped plastic articles having replicated microstructure surfaces |
US4311489A (en) * | 1978-08-04 | 1982-01-19 | Norton Company | Coated abrasive having brittle agglomerates of abrasive grain |
GB2043501B (en) | 1979-02-28 | 1982-11-24 | Interface Developments Ltd | Abrading member |
US4314827A (en) * | 1979-06-29 | 1982-02-09 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Non-fused aluminum oxide-based abrasive mineral |
US4420527A (en) * | 1980-09-05 | 1983-12-13 | Rexham Corporation | Thermoset relief patterned sheet |
US4588419A (en) * | 1980-10-08 | 1986-05-13 | Carborundum Abrasives Company | Resin systems for high energy electron curable resin coated webs |
SU975375A1 (en) | 1981-01-04 | 1982-11-23 | Украинский полиграфический институт им.Ивана Федорова | Abrasive cloth |
GB2094824B (en) | 1981-03-12 | 1985-07-17 | Interface Developments Ltd | Abrasive member |
SU996178A1 (en) | 1981-08-27 | 1983-02-15 | Ордена Трудового Красного Знамени Институт Сверхтвердых Материалов Ан Усср | Abrasive polishing tool |
JPS58151477A (en) * | 1982-03-02 | 1983-09-08 | Nippon Tenshiyashi Kk | Manufacture of metallic polishing body |
DE3219567A1 (en) * | 1982-05-25 | 1983-12-01 | SEA Schleifmittel Entwicklung Anwendung GmbH, 7530 Pforzheim | ELASTIC GRINDING BODY AND METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF |
US5527368C1 (en) | 1983-03-11 | 2001-05-08 | Norton Co | Coated abrasives with rapidly curable adhesives |
US4588258A (en) * | 1983-09-12 | 1986-05-13 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Cube-corner retroreflective articles having wide angularity in multiple viewing planes |
DE3335933A1 (en) * | 1983-10-04 | 1985-04-18 | Rütgerswerke AG, 6000 Frankfurt | MULTI-COMPONENT BINDERS WITH EXTENDED PROCESSABILITY |
US4623364A (en) * | 1984-03-23 | 1986-11-18 | Norton Company | Abrasive material and method for preparing the same |
US4553982A (en) * | 1984-05-31 | 1985-11-19 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Co. | Coated abrasive containing epoxy binder and method of producing the same |
US4983458A (en) * | 1984-09-21 | 1991-01-08 | Potters Industries, Inc. | Reflective particles |
US4642126A (en) * | 1985-02-11 | 1987-02-10 | Norton Company | Coated abrasives with rapidly curable adhesives and controllable curvature |
CA1254238A (en) * | 1985-04-30 | 1989-05-16 | Alvin P. Gerk | Process for durable sol-gel produced alumina-based ceramics, abrasive grain and abrasive products |
US4652274A (en) * | 1985-08-07 | 1987-03-24 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Coated abrasive product having radiation curable binder |
US4652275A (en) * | 1985-08-07 | 1987-03-24 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Erodable agglomerates and abrasive products containing the same |
US4773920B1 (en) * | 1985-12-16 | 1995-05-02 | Minnesota Mining & Mfg | Coated abrasive suitable for use as a lapping material. |
US4770671A (en) * | 1985-12-30 | 1988-09-13 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive grits formed of ceramic containing oxides of aluminum and yttrium, method of making and using the same and products made therewith |
SU1316805A1 (en) | 1986-02-06 | 1987-06-15 | Хмельницкий Технологический Институт Бытового Обслуживания | Method of producing grinding belt with programmed arrangement of grain |
US4644703A (en) * | 1986-03-13 | 1987-02-24 | Norton Company | Plural layered coated abrasive |
US4751138A (en) * | 1986-08-11 | 1988-06-14 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Coated abrasive having radiation curable binder |
US4875259A (en) * | 1986-09-08 | 1989-10-24 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Intermeshable article |
US4775219A (en) * | 1986-11-21 | 1988-10-04 | Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company | Cube-corner retroreflective articles having tailored divergence profiles |
US4799939A (en) * | 1987-02-26 | 1989-01-24 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Erodable agglomerates and abrasive products containing the same |
US4735632A (en) * | 1987-04-02 | 1988-04-05 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Coated abrasive binder containing ternary photoinitiator system |
US4881951A (en) * | 1987-05-27 | 1989-11-21 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Co. | Abrasive grits formed of ceramic containing oxides of aluminum and rare earth metal, method of making and products made therewith |
US5086086A (en) * | 1987-08-28 | 1992-02-04 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Energy-induced curable compositions |
US4950696A (en) * | 1987-08-28 | 1990-08-21 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Energy-induced dual curable compositions |
US4952612A (en) * | 1987-08-28 | 1990-08-28 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Energy-induced curable compositions |
US5147900A (en) * | 1987-08-28 | 1992-09-15 | Minnesosta Mining And Manufacturing Company | Energy-induced dual curable compositions |
JP2707264B2 (en) * | 1987-12-28 | 1998-01-28 | ハイ・コントロール・リミテッド | Polishing sheet and method for producing the same |
US5022895A (en) * | 1988-02-14 | 1991-06-11 | Wiand Ronald C | Multilayer abrading tool and process |
US4930266A (en) * | 1988-02-26 | 1990-06-05 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive sheeting having individually positioned abrasive granules |
US4985340A (en) * | 1988-06-01 | 1991-01-15 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Energy curable compositions: two component curing agents |
US5011508A (en) * | 1988-10-14 | 1991-04-30 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Shelling-resistant abrasive grain, a method of making the same, and abrasive products |
US4903440A (en) * | 1988-11-23 | 1990-02-27 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive product having binder comprising an aminoplast resin |
US5175030A (en) | 1989-02-10 | 1992-12-29 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Microstructure-bearing composite plastic articles and method of making |
US4959265A (en) * | 1989-04-17 | 1990-09-25 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape fastener for releasably attaching an object to a fabric |
US5093180A (en) * | 1989-05-02 | 1992-03-03 | Union Carbide Coatings Service Technology Corporation | Liquid transfer articles and method for producing them |
US5014468A (en) * | 1989-05-05 | 1991-05-14 | Norton Company | Patterned coated abrasive for fine surface finishing |
US5061294A (en) * | 1989-05-15 | 1991-10-29 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive article with conductive, doped, conjugated, polymer coat and method of making same |
US5011513A (en) * | 1989-05-31 | 1991-04-30 | Norton Company | Single step, radiation curable ophthalmic fining pad |
US4997461A (en) * | 1989-09-11 | 1991-03-05 | Norton Company | Nitrified bonded sol gel sintered aluminous abrasive bodies |
US5199227A (en) * | 1989-12-20 | 1993-04-06 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Surface finishing tape |
US5039311A (en) * | 1990-03-02 | 1991-08-13 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive granules |
US5232470A (en) * | 1990-05-21 | 1993-08-03 | Wiand Ronald C | Flexible one-piece diamond sheet material with spaced apart abrasive portions |
US5174795A (en) * | 1990-05-21 | 1992-12-29 | Wiand Ronald C | Flexible abrasive pad with ramp edge surface |
US5137542A (en) * | 1990-08-08 | 1992-08-11 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive printed with an electrically conductive ink |
US5077870A (en) * | 1990-09-21 | 1992-01-07 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Mushroom-type hook strip for a mechanical fastener |
US5078753A (en) * | 1990-10-09 | 1992-01-07 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Coated abrasive containing erodable agglomerates |
US5090968A (en) * | 1991-01-08 | 1992-02-25 | Norton Company | Process for the manufacture of filamentary abrasive particles |
US5107626A (en) * | 1991-02-06 | 1992-04-28 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Method of providing a patterned surface on a substrate |
US5378251A (en) * | 1991-02-06 | 1995-01-03 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive articles and methods of making and using same |
US5152917B1 (en) * | 1991-02-06 | 1998-01-13 | Minnesota Mining & Mfg | Structured abrasive article |
US5236472A (en) * | 1991-02-22 | 1993-08-17 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive product having a binder comprising an aminoplast binder |
US5131926A (en) * | 1991-03-15 | 1992-07-21 | Norton Company | Vitrified bonded finely milled sol gel aluminous bodies |
US5273558A (en) * | 1991-08-30 | 1993-12-28 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive composition and articles incorporating same |
US5273805A (en) * | 1991-08-05 | 1993-12-28 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Structured flexible carrier web with recess areas bearing a layer of silicone on predetermined surfaces |
GB2263911B (en) * | 1991-12-10 | 1995-11-08 | Minnesota Mining & Mfg | Tool comprising abrasives in an electrodeposited metal binder dispersed in a binder matrix |
US5316812A (en) * | 1991-12-20 | 1994-05-31 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Coated abrasive backing |
US5437754A (en) | 1992-01-13 | 1995-08-01 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive article having precise lateral spacing between abrasive composite members |
US5219462A (en) * | 1992-01-13 | 1993-06-15 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive article having abrasive composite members positioned in recesses |
US5178646A (en) * | 1992-01-22 | 1993-01-12 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Coatable thermally curable binder presursor solutions modified with a reactive diluent, abrasive articles incorporating same, and methods of making said abrasive articles |
US5176155A (en) * | 1992-03-03 | 1993-01-05 | Rudolph Jr James M | Method and device for filing nails |
US5201101A (en) * | 1992-04-28 | 1993-04-13 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Method of attaching articles and a pair of articles fastened by the method |
US5203884A (en) * | 1992-06-04 | 1993-04-20 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive article having vanadium oxide incorporated therein |
US5287863A (en) * | 1992-06-23 | 1994-02-22 | Joie Aldran H | Fingernail and toenail file/buffer |
US5201916A (en) * | 1992-07-23 | 1993-04-13 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Shaped abrasive particles and method of making same |
BR9307667A (en) * | 1992-12-17 | 1999-08-31 | Minnesota Mining & Mfg | Suspension suitable for use in the production of abrasive articles, coated abrasives, and, process for making a coated abrasive |
US5435816A (en) | 1993-01-14 | 1995-07-25 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Method of making an abrasive article |
US5398455A (en) | 1993-01-14 | 1995-03-21 | United Technologies Corporation | Grinding tool |
JPH08510693A (en) * | 1993-05-26 | 1996-11-12 | ミネソタ マイニング アンド マニュファクチャリング カンパニー | How to give a smooth surface to the substrate |
US5658184A (en) | 1993-09-13 | 1997-08-19 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Nail tool and method of using same to file, polish and/or buff a fingernail or a toenail |
US5489235A (en) | 1993-09-13 | 1996-02-06 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive article and method of making same |
SG64333A1 (en) * | 1993-09-13 | 1999-04-27 | Minnesota Mining & Mfg | Abrasive article method of manufacture of same method of using same for finishing and a production tool |
US5454844A (en) | 1993-10-29 | 1995-10-03 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive article, a process of making same, and a method of using same to finish a workpiece surface |
US5453312A (en) | 1993-10-29 | 1995-09-26 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Abrasive article, a process for its manufacture, and a method of using it to reduce a workpiece surface |
-
1994
- 1994-01-21 SG SG1996005163A patent/SG64333A1/en unknown
- 1994-01-21 CA CA 2170989 patent/CA2170989A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 1994-01-21 JP JP50915195A patent/JP3587209B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-01-21 AU AU61643/94A patent/AU679968B2/en not_active Ceased
- 1994-01-21 RU RU96107412A patent/RU2124978C1/en active
- 1994-01-21 EP EP94908617A patent/EP0720520B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-01-21 KR KR1019960701249A patent/KR100313263B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1994-01-21 DE DE1994619764 patent/DE69419764T2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-01-21 WO PCT/US1994/000754 patent/WO1995007797A1/en active IP Right Grant
- 1994-01-21 BR BR9407536A patent/BR9407536A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1994-01-21 CN CN94193349A patent/CN1067315C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1994-01-21 AT AT94908617T patent/ATE182502T1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1994-01-21 ES ES94908617T patent/ES2134930T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-01-27 ZA ZA94585A patent/ZA94585B/en unknown
-
1995
- 1995-12-05 US US08/567,723 patent/US5672097A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
1996
- 1996-03-12 NO NO961011A patent/NO961011L/en unknown
-
1997
- 1997-09-29 US US08/940,267 patent/US6129540A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
1999
- 1999-02-26 US US09/259,488 patent/US6076248A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2000
- 2000-03-06 US US09/520,032 patent/US20020009514A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2001
- 2001-09-19 US US09/955,604 patent/US20020028264A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2003
- 2003-10-08 JP JP2003349661A patent/JP3805765B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
KR960704680A (en) | 1996-10-09 |
NO961011D0 (en) | 1996-03-12 |
JP2004025445A (en) | 2004-01-29 |
ATE182502T1 (en) | 1999-08-15 |
EP0720520B1 (en) | 1999-07-28 |
CN1141016A (en) | 1997-01-22 |
DE69419764D1 (en) | 1999-09-02 |
JPH09502665A (en) | 1997-03-18 |
US20020028264A1 (en) | 2002-03-07 |
JP3805765B2 (en) | 2006-08-09 |
US6129540A (en) | 2000-10-10 |
EP0720520A1 (en) | 1996-07-10 |
JP3587209B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 |
WO1995007797A1 (en) | 1995-03-23 |
DE69419764T2 (en) | 1999-12-23 |
KR100313263B1 (en) | 2001-12-28 |
US5672097A (en) | 1997-09-30 |
ES2134930T3 (en) | 1999-10-16 |
NO961011L (en) | 1996-05-13 |
US6076248A (en) | 2000-06-20 |
SG64333A1 (en) | 1999-04-27 |
AU679968B2 (en) | 1997-07-17 |
ZA94585B (en) | 1995-07-27 |
RU2124978C1 (en) | 1999-01-20 |
BR9407536A (en) | 1997-08-26 |
AU6164394A (en) | 1995-04-03 |
US20020009514A1 (en) | 2002-01-24 |
CN1067315C (en) | 2001-06-20 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
AU679968B2 (en) | Abrasive article, method of manufacture of same, method of using same for finishing, and a production tool | |
EP0745020B1 (en) | Abrasive article, a method of making same, and a method of using same for finishing | |
US5658184A (en) | Nail tool and method of using same to file, polish and/or buff a fingernail or a toenail | |
AU676084B2 (en) | Abrasive articles and methods of making and using same | |
EP0642889B1 (en) | Abrasive article and method of making same | |
EP0725706B1 (en) | Abrasive article, a process of making same, and a method of using same to finish a workpiece surface | |
US7267700B2 (en) | Structured abrasive with parabolic sides | |
EP1663579A1 (en) | Abrasive article and methods of making the same |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
EEER | Examination request | ||
FZDE | Discontinued |